JP7466926B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventional gaming machines generally determine whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player.

Among these gaming machines, there are some that determine whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information acquired when an acquisition condition is met, and execute a performance according to the determination result (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2018-057968 A

However, the problem with the gaming machines described in the above patent documents was that the gameplay was not very interesting.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing any one of a plurality of special games advantageous to a player, the gaming machine comprising : a winning device provided with a specific area therein; acquisition means capable of acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; judgment means capable of judging the judgment information acquired by the acquisition means; specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game for converting the winning device from a closed state to an open state based on the result of the judgment; special game execution means capable of executing the special game based on the winning of a gaming medium into the specific area during the specific game; game state control means capable of controlling to a time-saving game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state; and a plurality of presentation drawings based on the result of the judgment. and a presentation control means capable of executing a variable presentation for displaying a variable pattern, the time-saving game state includes a first time- saving game state and a second time- saving game state, and when a specific special game among the plurality of special games is executed based on the winning of a game medium into the specific area during the specific game, the game state control means is capable of controlling to the second time- saving game state after the end of the special game, and when the variable presentation is executed to notify the player that the specific game that will be the trigger for the execution of the specific special game will be played, the presentation control means is capable of displaying a stop result of a first specific presentation pattern in the variable presentation, and is capable of displaying a stop result of a first specific presentation pattern in the variable presentation, and is capable of displaying a stop result of a first specific presentation pattern in the variable presentation before the trigger for the execution of a special game different from the specific special game. When the variable performance notifying that the specific game will be played is executed, a stop result by a second specific performance pattern different from the first specific performance pattern can be displayed in the variable performance, and a rate at which the stop result by the first specific performance pattern is displayed when the variable performance notifying that the specific game which will be a trigger for the execution of the specific special game will be played in the first time-shortened game state is executed and a rate at which the stop result by the first specific performance pattern is displayed when the variable performance notifying that the specific game which will be a trigger for the execution of the specific special game will be played in the second time-shortened game state are executed are different, and the game state control means controls the first time-shortened game state to be executed. When the game medium enters the specific area during the execution of the specific game due to the display of a stop result with the first specific performance pattern in the variable performance executed during the short game state, the game state is the time-shortened game state in response to the end of the special game executed based on the winning, and when the game medium enters the specific area during the execution of the specific game due to the display of a stop result with the second specific performance pattern in the variable performance executed during the first time-shortened game state, the game state is the normal game state in response to the end of the special game executed based on the winning.

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine. 2 is an oblique view of the rear side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of various storage areas of a main RAM. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing main processing in a main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an initial setting process in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing input control processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the first starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the second starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the special diagram special electric control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern memory determination process in the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot determination process on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. A diagram showing the special chart variation pattern determination process in the main control board. A figure showing an example of a special chart variation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-determination table. A diagram showing special pattern change processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern stopping processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a control data determination table. A diagram showing the jackpot game processing on the main control board. A diagram showing small win game processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot game ending processing on the main control board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game status setting table. A diagram showing the game state referenced at the end of a big win game that does not involve a small win game. A diagram showing the game state referred to at the end of a big win game that goes through a small win game. A diagram showing the general-purpose power control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing normal pattern change processing on the main control board. 11 is a diagram showing an example of various determination tables used in the normal power control process; FIG. A diagram showing the operating state of the variable starting unit in various time-saving game states. This is a game flow when a big win game is executed in the normal game state. This is a game flow when a jackpot game is executed in the time-saving game state. A diagram showing the main processing of the performance control unit. A diagram showing timer interrupt processing of the performance control unit. 11 is a mode flow showing the transition of presentation modes. 11 is a mode flow showing the transition of presentation modes. A diagram showing the command analysis process of the performance control unit. A diagram showing the icon change performance decision process of the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing the predictive consecutive performance decision processing of the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a pre-reading reach performance scenario determination table for misses. A figure showing an example of a pre-reading reach performance scenario determination table for a jackpot. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table. A figure showing an example of a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table. A diagram showing the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table. A diagram showing a presentation pattern related to a pre-reading reach presentation scenario in which a SP reach presentation is executed. A figure showing a presentation pattern related to a pre-reading reach presentation scenario in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed. A diagram showing the relationship between combinations of performance patterns and the skill performances executed. A figure showing an example of a performance when two types of skill performance are executed in a variable performance. A figure showing a first example of a presentation when a pre-reading reach presentation is executed. A figure showing a second example of a presentation in which a pre-reading reach presentation is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when transitioning from a challenge mode to a home mode. A figure showing the continuation of the example of the presentation when transitioning from the challenge mode to the home mode. A figure showing an example of the presentation when a jackpot game that transitions to legend mode A is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation when a small win game is executed in legend mode A. A figure showing the continuation of the example presentation when a small win game is executed in legend mode A. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a small win game is executed in legend mode B. This figure shows the continuation of the example presentation when a small win game is executed in legend mode B but ends up crashing.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of a gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to Figures 1 to 3. Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, Figure 2 is a perspective view of a portion of the front side of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 3 is a perspective view of the rear side of the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls (gaming media) flow down.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed forward, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the play area 5a through this opening 8 and transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative LEDs, an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls, such as game balls paid out from a payout device 95 described below based on the establishment of the awarding conditions, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 that can be operated to launch the game balls.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and output BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. In addition, multiple frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and create a lighting effect by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). In addition, the frame lighting device 10 is equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a payout abnormality occurs in which game balls cannot be paid out from the payout device 95.

The bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 for the game balls slopes downward toward the direction (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the ball feed solenoid 11b operates to send the game balls out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3.

In addition, in the central front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see Figure 1 or Figure 2) are arranged side by side and function as input devices for performing decision operations and selection operations related to various performances described below.

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 capable of performing operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a for detecting the operation of the effect button 17, an effect button drive device 17b equipped with a button drive motor for changing the effect button 17 between a normal state and a protruding state positioned higher than the normal state and a button vibration motor for changing the effect button 17 between the normal state and a vibration state in which the effect button 17 vibrates in a predetermined manner, and an effect button light-emitting LED 17c for changing the effect button 17 between an off state and a lit state in which the effect button 17 emits light in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (upper button 191A, left button 192A, lower button 193A, right button 194A) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 5) for detecting the operation of the cross key 19, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11, which allows the lending of game balls and the return of storage media such as cards that store the remaining balance. When the lending button 20a on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, a ball lending machine (not shown) installed next to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the remaining balance stored in the storage media and lends out game balls, and when the return button 20b on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage media is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 4) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout device 95, which will be described later, stops paying out game balls.

The launch operation device 13 is provided with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 4) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, and a launch volume 15b (see FIG. 4) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting portion for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 (see FIG. 4) for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism (not shown) for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a (see FIG. 4) for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section 25, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 4) for driving the launching member, a launching rail that slopes upward from the launching member toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper that stops the game ball at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b (see FIG. 4) is received at the launch position, the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

Curved inner and outer rails 35 and 36 are provided near the outer edge of the game board 5, and the area surrounded by the inner and outer rails 35 and 36 forms a game area 5a into which game balls can flow. A launched ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner and outer rails 35 and 36, which guides game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. An outlet 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the game area 5a to guide the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (to the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40 is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, which is a frame-shaped area known as a center case that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior. This decorative frame 40 divides the play area 5a into a left play area where game balls launched with a first launch force flow down, and a right play area where game balls launched with a second launch force that is stronger than the first launch force flow down, and the left play area and the right play area are connected below the decorative frame 40.

A warp device 41 is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 40 to guide the game balls flowing down the left side game area into the interior of the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided on the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

Three general winning openings 43 through which game balls can always enter (enter) are provided at intervals at the lower left side of the decorative frame 40, and one general winning opening 43 through which game balls can always enter (enter) is provided at the lower right side of the decorative frame 40. When a game ball that has entered (entered) this general winning opening 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 4) (awarding condition is met), a predetermined number (e.g., five) of game balls (game media) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding of prize value).

Below the stage section 42, there is a first start hole A45 (a start winning area for a first special symbol) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) this first start hole A45 is detected by the first start hole A detection switch 45a (see FIG. 4) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarding of prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is to be played is granted (special symbol determination information, described later, is stored).

On the right side of the decorative frame 40, a first variable starting section 46A is provided which changes the state from a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter (a ball entering) to an open state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter when a certain condition is met (the first starting port operating piece 48f is pressed by a game ball when an auxiliary game described below is played), and also changes from the open state to the closed state when a game ball enters.

The first variable starting section 46A is provided with a first starting hole B46 (a starting winning area for the first special symbol) through which a game ball can enter, a first starting hole opening/closing member 46b in the form of an opening/closing blade whose upper part can move left and right as its lower part is supported on the left side of the first starting hole B46, and a first starting hole B detection switch 46a (see Figure 4) which detects a game ball that has entered (entered) the first starting hole B46.

When a game ball enters the first start hole B46 and is detected by the first start hole B detection switch 46a (see FIG. 4) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is to be played is granted (special game determination information, described later, is stored).

Below the decorative frame 40 and below the first variable starting part 46A, there is a second variable starting part 47A which changes from a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) for a game ball to enter (slot in) to an open state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter when a certain condition is met (when the second starting part 48g is pressed by a game ball as an auxiliary game is played, as described below), and also changes from the open state to the closed state when a game ball enters.

The second variable starting section 47A is provided with a second starting hole 47 (a starting winning area of the second special symbol) through which a game ball can enter, a second starting hole opening/closing member 47b in the form of an opening/closing blade whose upper part can move left and right as its lower part is supported on the left side of the second starting hole 47, and a second starting hole detection switch 47a (see Figure 4) which detects a game ball that has entered (entered) the second starting hole 47.

When a game ball enters the second start hole 47 and is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 4) (awarding conditions are met), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, two balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls (awarded prize value). In addition, the right to make a jackpot determination as to whether or not a special game (jackpot game) is executed is granted (special game determination information, described later, is stored).

A normal gate 44 (normal starting area) through which the game ball can always pass is provided to the lower left of the second variable starting section 47A. When a game ball that has passed through the normal gate 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, no prize ball is awarded, but the right to make an auxiliary game judgment (win judgment) to determine whether or not to execute an auxiliary game that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting hole B46 or the second starting hole 47 is granted (normal game judgment information described later is stored). In addition, if a game ball passes through when the conditions for executing a jackpot game are met, the execution conditions for executing multiple rounds of play are also established (the role continuous operation device is activated).

Below the second variable starting part 47A and to the lower right of the normal gate 44, a conversion mechanism part 48 is provided to convert the first variable starting part 46A or the second variable starting part 47A from a closed state to an open state by using the weight of the game ball that has flowed (entered) inside.

The conversion mechanism 48 includes an upper flow path 48a, a left flow path 48b that branches off to the left from a branch located at the lower end of the upper flow path 48a, a right flow path 48c that branches off to the right from the branch, an inlet opening/closing member 48d that opens and closes the inlet (inlet opening) of the upper flow path 48a, an inlet opening/closing solenoid 48h (see FIG. 4) for switching the inlet opening/closing member 48d between a closed state and an open state, a flow path switching member 48e that is located at the branch and distributes game balls to one of the left flow path 48b and the right flow path 48c, a distribution flow path switching solenoid 48i (see FIG. 4) for switching the flow path switching member 48e between a first state in which game balls are distributed to the left flow path 48b and a second state in which game balls are distributed to the right flow path 48c, a first start port operating piece 48f that is pressed by game balls that flow into the left flow path 48b, and a second start port operating piece 48g that is pressed by game balls that flow into the right flow path 48c.

Then, when the auxiliary game is played, the inlet opening/closing member 48d is converted to an open state, and when the game ball guided by the inlet opening/closing member 48d from the inlet (introduction opening) of the upper flow path 48a into the inside of the conversion mechanism unit 48 reaches the branching portion, the game ball is distributed to the left flow path 48b or the right flow path 48c by the flow path switching member 48e. After that, when the first starting port operating piece 48f is pressed by the game ball distributed to the left flow path 48b, the first starting port opening/closing member 46b of the first variable starting unit 46A is converted to an open state via a link mechanism (not shown), while when the second starting port operating piece 48g is pressed by the game ball distributed to the right flow path 48c, the second starting port opening/closing member 47b of the second variable starting unit 47A is converted to an open state via a link mechanism (not shown).

On the left side of the conversion mechanism 48, there is a first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) that can be converted from a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball to win (enter the prize) to an open state in which it is possible (easy) to win, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (determined to be a small win).

The first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to form a flow path for the game balls, and is provided with a first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 that can move in the front-back direction, a first large winning opening 50 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51, a first large winning opening detection switch 50a (see Figure 4) that detects game balls that have won (entered) the first large winning opening 50, and a first large winning opening opening opening solenoid 50b (see Figure 4) that converts the first large winning opening 50 to a closed state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the first large winning opening 50 to an open state by moving the first large winning opening opening/closing member 51 backward (winning permitted position).

Inside the first large winning opening 50, there is a specific area opening/closing member 52 whose upper surface slopes downward in the left-right direction (right side in the figure) to form a flow path for game balls and which can move in the front-back direction, a specific area 53 that opens upward directly below the specific area opening/closing member 52, a specific area detection switch 53a (see Figure 4) that detects game balls that have flowed into (entered) the specific area 53, a flow path switching solenoid 52b (see Figure 4) that converts the specific area 53 into a closed state by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the specific area 53 into an open state by moving the specific area opening/closing member 52 backward (winning permission position), and an outlet 54 into which game balls that have not flowed into the specific area 53 flow, and the first large winning opening detection switch 50a detects game balls that have flowed into the outlet 54.

Then, during the small prize game described below, when the first large prize opening opening/closing member 51 moves backward and the first large prize opening 50 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the first large prize opening opening opening/closing member 51 or that have reached the first large prize opening 50 enter the first large prize opening 50, and when these game balls are detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

When a game ball passes through (enters) the specific area 53 that is open during the small win game described below and is detected by the specific area detection switch 53a, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 95 (see FIG. 3) to the upper tray 11, and the big win game described below is executed after the small win game ends.

In addition, instead of providing the specific area opening/closing member 52, the specific area 53, and the specific area detection switch 53a, the first large prize opening detection switch 50a may be set as the specific area, and the game ball that flows into the first large prize opening that is opened during the small prize game described below may be detected by the first large prize opening detection switch 50a, so that the large prize game described below is executed after the small prize game ends.

In this embodiment, the big win game and the small win game that convert the big prize opening into an open state are treated as special games that are advantageous to the player, but there are cases where the big win game is treated as a special game and the small win game is treated as a specific game.

To the lower left of the first variable winning section 49 (first variable winning device) is a second variable winning section 55 (second variable winning device) that can be changed from a closed state in which it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball to win (enter) a prize to an open state in which it is possible (easy) to win a prize based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (a big win is determined, or the game ball enters a specific area 53 during a small win game).

The second variable prize winning section 55 (first variable prize winning device) has an upper surface that slopes downward in the left-right direction (left side in the figure) to form a flow path for the game balls, and is provided with a second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 that can move in the front-back direction, a second large prize winning opening 56 (winning area) that opens upward directly below the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57, a second large prize winning opening detection switch 56a (see Figure 4) that detects game balls that have won (entered) the second large prize winning opening 56, and a second large prize winning opening opening opening solenoid 56b (see Figure 4) that converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to a closed state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 forward (winning restriction position) and converts the second large prize winning opening 56 to an open state by moving the second large prize winning opening opening/closing member 57 backward (winning permitted position).

When the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 moves backwards during a jackpot game and the second large prize opening 56 is converted from a closed state to an open state, the game balls that have flowed down the top surface of the second large prize opening opening/closing member 57 or that have reached the second large prize opening 56 enter the second large prize opening 56, and when these game balls are detected by the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout device 95 (see Figure 3) to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

The game balls launched into the left side game area will either flow directly down along the outer edge of the decorative frame 40, or flow into the warp device 41 and then flow down through the stage section 42, and enter one of the four general winning holes 43 and the first starting hole A45 located below the decorative frame 40, or flow into the out hole 39. Therefore, the game balls will not enter (pass through) the general gate 44, the first variable starting hole 46A (first starting hole B46), the second variable starting hole 47A (second starting hole 46), the first variable winning hole 49 (first large winning hole 50), or the second variable winning hole 55 (second large winning hole 56) located in the right side game area.

In addition, a game ball launched into the right-side game area will win the first variable starting section 46A (first starting port B46), the second variable starting section 47A (second starting port 47), the general gate 44, the first variable winning section (first large winning port 50), the second variable winning section (second large winning port 56), or the general winning port 43 located in the right-side game area, or will flow into the out port 39. Therefore, it will not win the general winning port 43 or the first starting port A45 located in the left-side game area.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects out-balls, which are game balls that have won in the general winning port 43, the first starting port A45, the first starting port B46, the second starting port 47, the first large winning port 50, and the second large winning port 56, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 39a (see Figure 4) is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls detected by the out-ball detection switch 39a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is a pattern display device consisting of a first special pattern display 60, a second special pattern display 61, and a normal pattern display 62, a reserved display device consisting of a first special pattern reserved display 63, a second special pattern reserved display 64, and a normal pattern reserved display 65, and a main information display 69 consisting of a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, and a status confirmation display 68.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a first special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the first starting hole A45 or the first starting hole B46, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a jackpot determination for a second special symbol, which is made based on the entry (entry) of a game ball into the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of a hit determination for a normal symbol, which is made based on the passage (entry) of a game ball into the normal gate 44.

The jackpot determination corresponds to obtaining special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for special symbol determination, random number value for reach determination, random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) when a game ball enters (enters) the first start hole A45, the first start hole B46, or the second start hole 47, and determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game or a small jackpot game based on the obtained special symbol determination information.

When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering first start hole A45 or first start hole B46, the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a varying manner, and after a predetermined time has passed, the first special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination. When a jackpot is determined based on a game ball entering second start hole 47, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination, and after a predetermined time has passed, the second special symbol is displayed stationarily to notify the result of the determination.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of multiple LEDs, and when each special symbol changes, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at a predetermined interval or sequence. When a special symbol is displayed in a static state, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the jackpot determination (jackpot, small jackpot, or miss).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the jackpot determination that a jackpot game (special game) will be played. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to a player who plays a round game in which the big prize opening (second big prize opening 56) is converted from a closed state to an open state in a predetermined manner a predetermined number of times (e.g., 2 times, 10 times, etc.) with intervals in between, and in which the player is likely to win prize balls.

The maximum number of times the large prize openings (first large prize opening 50, second large prize opening 56) can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize openings (balls enter the opening) even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time are reached, one round of play ends. In this embodiment, it is possible to play one of several types of large prize games (special games) that differ in the degree of advantage given to the player.

"Small win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the big win judgment that a small win game (specific game) will be played. "Small win game" refers to a game state that is advantageous to players who play a game in which the big win opening (first big win opening 50) is converted from a closed state to an open state in a less favorable manner than in a big win game, making it easier for the player to win prize balls.

The maximum opening time for the large prize opening during a small prize game (1.8 seconds) is a predetermined time, but if a certain number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the large prize opening (balls enter the opening) before the maximum opening time is reached, the small prize game ends.

The auxiliary game judgment corresponds to obtaining normal game judgment information (random number value for winning judgment, random number value for normal pattern judgment, random number value for normal pattern variation pattern judgment, etc.) based on the passage (entry) of the game ball into the normal game gate 44, and judging whether or not to execute the auxiliary game based on the obtained normal game judgment information. When the auxiliary game judgment is made, the normal pattern display 62 displays the variation of the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time has passed, a stationary display of the normal pattern is made to notify the judgment result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of multiple LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that notifies the result of the auxiliary game judgment (win or miss).

In this embodiment, a "win" refers to a state in which it has been determined in the auxiliary game judgment that an auxiliary game (a winning game) will be executed. An "auxiliary game" refers to a game state in which the entrance opening and closing member 48d of the conversion mechanism 48 is converted to an open state in a predetermined manner, making it easier for a game ball to enter the first variable starting portion 46A (first starting port B46) or the second variable starting portion 47A (second starting port 47).

The maximum number of operations and maximum operation time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d in the auxiliary game (winning game) are predetermined, but even before the maximum number of operations and maximum operation time are reached, if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter (enter) the first start hole B46 or the second start hole 47, the auxiliary game (winning game) ends. In other words, the "auxiliary game" is a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the first start hole B46 or the second start hole 47 (the starting conditions for the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern are likely to be met). In this embodiment, multiple types of auxiliary games (winning games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the first reserved number (U1), which is the number of special symbol determination information (first reserved memory) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole A45 or the first starting hole B46, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Note that up to a maximum of four first reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the second reserved number (U2), which is the number of special symbol determination information (second reserved memory) stored when a game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of second reserved memories. Note that, although a maximum of four second reserved memories can be stored, the number may be less than or more than four, or no second reserved memories may be stored.

The normal symbol reserved indicator 65 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of reserved normal symbols, which is the number of normal symbol judgment information (normal symbol reserved memories) stored when a game ball enters (passes through) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner indicating the number of normal symbol reserved memories. Note that up to four normal symbol reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be less or more than four, or no normal symbol reserved memories may be stored.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if a big win is determined in the big win determination, numbers such as "3" or "7" are displayed as static numbers, if a small win is determined, alphabets such as "A" or "C" are displayed as static numbers, and if a miss is determined, a static "-" is displayed as static numbers, and during the varying display, the light is turned off and the "-" is alternately displayed.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of multiple LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the leftmost LED lights up, and if the jackpot game has ten rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game) or time-limited game state. It is turned off during normal game mode, and the LED is turned on during a jackpot state (special game) and time-limited game mode.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. The status confirmation indicator 68 may be installed on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1, or may be installed in other locations.

A first image display device 70 (main LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a defined inside the decorative frame 40, a second image display device 71 (sub LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display formed with a smaller size and display area than the first image display device 70 is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70, a movable performance device 73 for executing action performances is provided at the top of the performance space 40a, and a change notification LED 59 for reporting the changing display status of the special pattern is provided at the right part of the performance space 40a.

The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 display various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is performed when the variable display of the special symbol is not being executed, a variable effect that accompanies the variable display of the special symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ that is executed when the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, and a jackpot effect that is executed during the execution of a jackpot game.

The second image display device 71 can also perform a moving effect by moving using a liquid crystal movable device (not shown) composed of a solenoid, motor, etc. while the first image display device 70 is performing a moving effect.

Specifically, the movement effect is achieved by vertical movement (rising and descending) between a standby position (lower position) located near the end of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (upper position) located near the center of the first image display device 70. Note that the movement direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD) may be left-right or front-back, or the movement effect may be achieved by operating the performance button 17.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) is formed with a variable display area for displaying three performance patterns 70a (left pattern, middle pattern, right pattern) and a mode display area showing the performance mode related to the execution of the variable performance.

The performance pattern 70a is composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and starts to change in response to the start of the changing display of the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61, and stops in response to the stop of the changing display of the special pattern. The performance pattern 70a may be a pattern showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

The performance symbols 70a are displayed stationary for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a manner that indicates the result of the jackpot determination (miss appearance, jackpot appearance, small win appearance). The jackpot appearance and small win appearance are combinations of the same performance symbols 70a, such as "777" and "555," while the miss appearance is any other appearance.

The display of the effect pattern 70a changes in a vertical scroll mode, but it may also scroll horizontally, or it may switch on the spot or rotate (spin).

In addition, during the changing display (changing performance) of the performance pattern 70a, various performance images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for the execution of the jackpot game (special game).

The first image display device 70 is provided with a first special pattern display area for displaying a first special pattern TZ1 which starts to vary in response to the start of the varying display of the first special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and displays a stopped display in response to the stop of the varying display of the special pattern, and a second special pattern display area for displaying a second special pattern TZ2 which starts to vary in response to the start of the varying display of the second special pattern executed by the second special pattern display device 61 and displays a stopped display in response to the stop of the varying display of the special pattern.

The first image display device 70 is also provided with a first hold icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first hold icons (first hold information) corresponding to the first hold number (U1) in the normal game state described below, a second hold icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second hold icons (second hold information) corresponding to the second hold number (U2) in the time-saving game state described below, an icon display area 70C for displaying the icon (execution information) indicating that a variable presentation is being executed, a first hold number display area 70E for displaying the first hold number (U1) numerically, and a second hold number display area 70F for displaying the second hold number (U2) numerically.

The first hold icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1 (first area), a second display section 70B2 (second area), a third display section 70B3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70B4 (fourth area) from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 display a number of first hold icons corresponding to the first hold number (U1).

Specifically, the first display unit 70B1 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display unit 70B2 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display unit 70B3 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays a first hold icon indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The second hold icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1 (first area), a second display section 70D2 (second area), a third display section 70D3 (third area), and a fourth display section 70D4 (fourth area) from the left, and the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 display the number of second hold icons corresponding to the second hold number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed first, the second display unit 70D2 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed second, the third display unit 70D3 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed third, and the fourth display unit 70D4 displays a second hold icon indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special pattern is executed fourth.

The icon display area 70C is formed directly above a pedestal image to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D, and the icon is displayed as if it is sitting or floating on top of this pedestal image.

Specifically, as the display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins to change, the first reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes that icon, and when the display of the first special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased).

In addition, as the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) begins, the second reserved icons displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D move (shift) one by one toward the icon display area 70C, and the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70D1 moves (shifts) to the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon, and when the display of the second special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends, the icon disappears (is erased). Note that the icon may be made to disappear during the display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a).

In the embodiment of the present invention, the first image display device 70 displays the changing effect pattern 70a, but the changing effect pattern 70a may be displayed by either the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or by both.

The movable performance device 73 has a first movable member 73a and a second movable member 73b that can be operated, and can perform a motion performance by making the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b perform a predetermined motion while the variable display of the performance pattern 70a executed by the first image display device 70 is being executed. In addition, the first movable member 73a and the second movable member 73b are provided with a board lighting device 74 having multiple decorative LEDs, and can emit light in a predetermined manner.

Specifically, the first movable member 73a moves (rising and descending) between a standby position (first position) located toward the end (upper) of the first image display device 70 and a performance position (second position) located toward the center (lower) of the first image display device 70. The second movable member 73b moves between a standby position (first position) that covers a portion of the front of the first movable member 73a and a performance position where it retreats from the front of the first movable member 73a.

The change notification LED 59 is composed of full-color LEDs, and includes a first change notification LED 59a (left side in FIG. 1) corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second change notification LED 59b (right side in FIG. 1) corresponding to the second special symbol. The first change notification LED 59a starts changing color (displaying the change of the first lamp symbol) in response to the start of the change display of the first special symbol, and stops changing color (displaying the change of the first lamp symbol) in response to the stop of the change display of the first special symbol, thereby notifying whether the first special symbol is changing. The second change notification LED 59b starts changing color (displaying the change of the second lamp symbol) in response to the start of the change display of the second special symbol, and stops changing color (displaying the change of the second lamp symbol) in response to the stop of the change display of the second special symbol, thereby notifying whether the second special symbol is changing.

The result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified by the combination of the stopped performance pattern 70a and the first lamp pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified by the combination of the stopped performance pattern 70a and the second lamp pattern. Also, the result of the first special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified by only the stopped first lamp pattern, and the result of the second special pattern change display (jackpot determination) may be notified by only the stopped second lamp pattern.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a payout device 95 for paying out game balls (game media) based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball loans), a game ball storage section 96 for storing game balls supplied from island equipment etc. and supplying them to the payout device 95, a main control device 110A incorporating a main control board 110, a payout control device 120A incorporating a payout control board 120, a performance control device 130A incorporating a performance control board 130, a power supply device 160A incorporating a power supply board 160, a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information to the outside of the game machine (information collection device such as a hall computer), etc.

In addition, a cover member 23 with an opening and closing door is provided, which opens and closes in the left and right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side to cover the upper part of the main control device and the entire performance control device from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22, covered by the cover member 23, for switching adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the image display device and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 74).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there are mounted a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being judged as a jackpot by the jackpot judgment), a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to switch to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode which will be described later by operating the setting key, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values which enable the actual performance of the gaming machine to be grasped, and other electronic components.

The information display 113 is composed of four seven-segment displays (113a to 113d) aligned horizontally. The two seven-segment displays from the left, 113a and 113b, form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two seven-segment displays from the right, 113c and 113d, form a numeric segment for displaying numeric information indicating setting values and numerical values of the performance information.

(Overall block diagram of the gaming machine)
Next, a control means for controlling the progress of a game will be described with reference to the overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1.

The control configuration of this embodiment includes a main control board 110 that controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations), a payout control board 120 that controls the payout of game balls based on the receipt of a payout control command from the main control board 110, a presentation control board 130 that controls the presentation related to the game based on the receipt of a presentation control command from the main control board 110, and a power supply board 160 that supplies power to the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, and the presentation control board 130.

The communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to enable bidirectional transmission and reception of commands, while the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to enable unidirectional transmission of commands from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The main control board 110 is equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and a main control unit 110m that is a one-chip microcomputer equipped with input/output ports, etc.

The input/output ports of the main control unit 110m include an out ball detection switch 39a, a general winning port detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting port A detection switch 45a, a first starting port B detection switch 46a, a second starting port detection switch 47a, an inlet opening/closing solenoid 48h, a distribution flow path switching solenoid 48i, a first large winning port detection switch 50a, a first large winning port opening/closing solenoid 50b, a flow path switching solenoid 52b, a specific area detection switch 53a, a second large winning port detection switch 56a, a second large winning port A mouth opening/closing solenoid 56b, a magnetic detection sensor 57a, a radio wave detection sensor 58a, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reserved display 63, a second special symbol reserved display 64, a normal symbol reserved display 65, a round number display 66, a right hit display 67, a status confirmation display 68, a game information output terminal board 90, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a payout control board 120, and a performance control board 130 are connected.

The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game control program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs calculation processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, detection sensors, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (solenoids, displays, etc.), control processing for sending and receiving various control commands, and control processing for sending game information to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) via the game information output terminal board 90.

The "game information" includes a start port winning signal output each time a game ball wins in the first start port A45, the first start port B46, or the second start port 47, a pattern determination signal output each time the varying display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is stopped, a jackpot signal output throughout the jackpot game, an open signal output throughout the round game (opening of the jackpot opening), a time-saving state signal output throughout the time-saving game state described below, and a security signal output when a situation that threatens the security of the gaming machine 1 occurs (RWM clear, error, etc.).

The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 95 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores payout programs, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 95a for detecting game balls being paid out from the payout device 95, a payout motor 95b for paying out game balls from the payout device 95, and a ball presence detection switch 96a for detecting that game balls are stored in the game ball storage unit 96.

The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for paying out game balls from the payout device 95 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, control processing for sending a command based on the result of the calculation processing to the main control board 110, etc.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit and an input/output port, which are not shown.
The input/output ports of the launch control unit 122 are connected to the ball feeding solenoid 11b, the touch sensor 15a, the launch volume 15b, and the launch solenoid 28b.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 by a detection signal from the launch volume 15b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 11b and drives the launch solenoid 28b so that the launch strength corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, thereby launching the game balls (99.9 balls/min).

The performance control board 130 is equipped with a performance control unit 130m that performs overall control of the progress of the performance based on the performance control commands received from the main control board 110, a display control unit 140 that performs control processing of image display and audio output based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m, and a lamp control unit 150 that performs control processing of various light-emitting components (LEDs, etc.) and various driving sources (motors, etc.) based on the performance control commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The performance control unit 130m includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs calculation processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the performance control program, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are connected to the input/output port of the performance control unit 130m.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the performance control program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for determining the performance mode of the variable performance, control processing for sending a performance control command based on the determination result to the display control unit 140, control processing in response to detection signals from various input devices (detection switches, etc.), control processing for controlling various output devices (lighting devices, motors, etc.), etc.

The display control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified voice or sound.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that performs general control of image display and audio output based on reception of a performance control command from the performance control unit 130m, an image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the general control unit 141, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the general control unit 141, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs calculation processing, an overall ROM 141b in which an overall control program is stored, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports to which an image control unit 145 (VDP) and an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) are connected.

The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for generating display control commands (display lists) that indicate the performance images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and sending them to the display control unit 140, and control processing for generating audio control commands that indicate the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit 150 are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the performance button drive device 17b (performance button drive motor, performance button vibration motor), the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the starter lamp 75, the movable performance device 73, and the board lighting device 74.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. This allows it to control the frame lighting device 10, the performance button drive device 17b, the performance button light-emitting LED 17c, the starter lamp 75, the movable performance device 73, and the board lighting device 74.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine, and supplies the main power supply to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) (corresponding to a power supply supply means). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether the supplied power supply voltage has dropped (a power outage has occurred) and outputs a voltage drop signal to the main control board 110 based on the drop in power supply voltage (occurrence of a power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that even if the power switch is turned OFF, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one week).

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a voltage drop detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, and stops outputting the voltage drop detection signal when the power supply voltage exceeds the predetermined value while the voltage drop detection signal is being output.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. This allows the contents stored in the main RAM 110c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout).

Although backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m, backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m so that the memory contents of the payout RAM 121c and the sub-RAM 130c are retained even in the event of a power outage. Backup power may also be supplied to only one of the payout control board 120 and the performance control unit 130m.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" and a "time-saving game state" as states related to the ease of winning the game ball into various starting holes (first starting hole B46, second starting hole 47).

The initial game state of the gaming machine 1 is set to the "normal game state." Also, during a jackpot game, the game state is set to the "normal game state," but since a jackpot game is being played, the game state is different from the normal game state.

Here, "normal game state (non-time-saving game state)" refers to a game state in which the probability of a win being determined in the auxiliary game judgment, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, is 255/256, the average time for the normal symbol variable display is set to approximately 1.5 seconds, and the operation time for the entrance opening/closing member 48d of the conversion mechanism unit 48 to the open state in the event of a win is set to 0.32 seconds.

In contrast, the "time-saving game state" refers to a game state that includes a "first time-saving game state," a "second time-saving game state," a "third time-saving game state," and a "fourth time-saving game state," in which the probability of a win is determined to be 255/256, the average time for the normal symbol to change display is set to approximately 0.1 seconds, and the operation time for the entrance opening/closing member 48d of the conversion mechanism unit 48 to the open state when a win is determined to be is set to 0.8 seconds or more, thereby reducing the consumption of game balls compared to the normal game state and being advantageous to players who are more likely to win with game balls entering the various start ports (first start port B46, second start port 47).

The "first time-saving game state" is controlled after the end of a jackpot game (via the jackpot game), and is a game state in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 47 than the various first start holes (first start hole A45, first start hole B46) (special 2 time-saving in which the variable display of the second special symbol is easier to execute than in the normal game state).

The "second time-saving game state" is a game state (special 1 time-saving game state in which the first special symbol variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal game state) that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) when the number of times the special symbol variable display is executed after a predetermined condition is met (executing RWM clear, clearing the number of variables to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches a specified number of times (600 times in this embodiment), and the game ball is more likely to enter the first start hole B46 than the first start hole A45 or the second start hole 47.

The "third time-saving game state" is controlled after the end of the jackpot game (via the jackpot game), and is a game state in which it is easier for the game ball to enter the first start hole B46 than the first start hole A45 or the second start hole 47 (a special 1-time saving game in which the variable display of the first special symbol is easier to execute than in the normal game state).

The "fourth time-saving game state" is a game state (without going through a jackpot game) that is controlled by the special miss being selected in the jackpot determination and the special miss special pattern being displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, making it easier for the game ball to enter the first start hole B46 than the first start hole A45 or the second start hole 47 (special 1 time-saving game state in which the variable display of the first special pattern is easier to execute than in the normal game state).

The "time-saving game state" is set to be more advantageous than the "normal game state" in terms of the average change time of the normal symbols and the operation time for the entrance opening/closing member 48d to be in the open state, but it may be set to be more advantageous in terms of only one of the probability of being determined to be a win, the average change time of the normal symbols, and the operation time for the entrance opening/closing member 48d to be in the open state.

(Various storage areas in the main RAM)
5 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 5(a) is a diagram showing a special chart judgment information storage area in which special chart judgment information acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole A45 and/or the second starting hole 47 is stored, FIG. 5(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special chart judgment information storage area, FIG. 5(c) is a normal chart judgment information storage area in which normal chart judgment information acquired when a game ball passes through the normal chart gate 44 is stored, and FIG. 5(d) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal chart judgment information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 6(a), the special pattern determination information storage area is divided into a first special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port A45 or the first start port B46 is stored, a second special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the second start port 47 is stored, and a special pattern determination information storage area in which special pattern determination information during variable display is stored, and the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area and the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area are each divided into a first memory section to a fourth memory section.

The first memory unit, second memory unit, third memory unit, and fourth memory unit of the first special pattern determination information reserved memory area correspond to the first display unit 70B1, second display unit 70B2, third display unit 70B3, and fourth display unit 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B, respectively. Also, the first memory unit, second memory unit, third memory unit, and fourth memory unit of the second special pattern reserved memory area correspond to the first display unit 70D1, second display unit 70D2, third display unit 70D3, and fourth display unit 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, respectively.

The number of special pattern judgment information (reserved memory, reserved information) stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the first special pattern judgment information storage area becomes the first reserved number (U1), and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to these special pattern judgment information will be displayed in the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first reserved icon display area 70B. Also, the number of special pattern judgment information (reserved memory, reserved information) stored in the first memory section to the fourth memory section of the second special pattern judgment information becomes the second reserved number (U2), and the number of reserved icons corresponding to these judgment information will be displayed in the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D.

The 0th memory unit, which is the special chart determination information execution storage area, corresponds to the icon display area 70C. The icon corresponding to the special chart determination information (execution information) stored in the 0th memory unit is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for determining a jackpot for storing random numbers for determining a jackpot, a random number memory area for determining a special symbol for storing random numbers for determining a special symbol, a random number memory area for determining a reach for a chance for storing random numbers for determining a reach for a chance ...

When a game ball enters the first starting hole A45 or the first starting hole B46 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest numbered memory section in the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 and special pattern determination information is acquired, the acquired special pattern determination information is stored in the smallest numbered memory section in the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area in which special pattern determination information is not stored.

When the start condition for the variable display of the first special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the first special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and is referenced to execute the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, when the start condition for the variable display of the second special pattern is satisfied, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit of the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area is shifted to be referenced to execute the variable display of the second special pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(c), the normal map judgment information storage area is divided into a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal map gate 44 is stored, and a normal map judgment information storage area in which normal map judgment information during execution of the variable display is stored, and the normal map judgment information reserve storage area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section. Note that the number of normal map reserves is the number of normal map judgment information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section of the normal map judgment information reserve storage area.

As shown in FIG. 5(d), each memory unit is divided into a random number memory area for hit determination for storing random number values for hit determination, a random number memory area for normal pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern determination, and a random number memory area for normal pattern variation pattern determination for storing random number values for normal pattern variation pattern determination.

When the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 and normal map judgment information is acquired, the acquired normal map judgment information is stored in the smallest-numbered memory section in the normal map judgment information reserve memory area in which no normal map judgment information is stored.

When the conditions for starting the display of changes in the normal pattern are met, the 0th memory unit, which is the normal pattern determination information execution memory area, shifts the normal pattern determination information stored in the 1st memory unit of the normal pattern determination information reserve memory area, and the information is referenced to execute the display of changes in the normal pattern.

(flowchart)
Next, the progress of the game on the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is a flowchart showing the main processing in the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs an initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, it performs a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing a setting value based on a setting change operation, an RWM clear process for initializing a specified RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on an RWM clear operation, a setting confirmation process for confirming a setting value based on a setting confirmation operation, and a drive source initial operation process for initializing various drive sources (various solenoids) provided in the board unit 500. Details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the random number value for determining the special symbol and the random number value for determining the reach, and in step S51, updates the initial random number value for determining the jackpot, the initial random number value for determining the special symbol, the initial random number value for determining the hit, and the initial random number value for determining the normal symbol.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a determines whether a voltage drop detection signal indicating a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, a voltage drop from 24 volts to less than 18 volts) has been input from the power interruption detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160. If a voltage drop detection signal has not been input, the process proceeds to step S50, and if a voltage drop detection signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 milliseconds). If the voltage drop detection signal has been continuously input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred and the process proceeds to step S54. If the voltage drop detection signal has not been input for the predetermined period, it is assumed that a momentary power outage has occurred, in which the voltage of the power supply drops for just a moment, and the process proceeds to step S52.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S55, sends a power-off designation command to the payout control board 120 to notify it that the power-off process has begun. This causes the payout control board 120, which has received the power-off designation command, to send a remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c to be paid out.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a remaining payout number designation command has been received. If a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S57. If a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether the waiting time for receiving the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the waiting time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S56. If the waiting time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S58, assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the payout number in the payout counter set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if a remaining payout number designation command has been received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number designation command is saved, and if a remaining payout number designation command has not been received, "0" is saved as the remaining payout number. The remaining payout number saved here is referenced in the timer interrupt payout control process described below, and after the power is restored, a payout number designation command corresponding to the remaining payout number is sent to the payout control board 120.

In step S59, the main CPU 110a clears the output port. This initializes the output state of the output port and stops the operation of various displays and various drive sources (motors, solenoids).

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. In this way, the next time the power is turned on, it becomes possible to perform an abnormality determination of the data in the main RAM 110c using the checksum.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data in the main RAM 110c has been backed up (power has been restored) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access and waits until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 begins, the initial setting process is performed, but when the supply of operating power resumes following a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts), the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is being performed due to some factor when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, and RWM clear process will not be executed, so the gaming machine will not perform unintended operations, and it is possible to ensure the reliability of the gaming machine.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is a flow chart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as setting built-in registers in step S12, and performs processing to wait for the startup of other control boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S15, sends a launch permission command to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control unit 121 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S17 assuming that power has been restored. If the backup flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S18 assuming that power has been turned on for the first time or that power has been restored irregularly (power has been restored after a power outage during execution of steps S18 to S35).

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates the checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 110c and clears the backup flag saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S19 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S19. Specifically, the main CPU 110a changes (updates) the setting value, which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination), based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, and performs a process to confirm the setting value by operating the setting key switch 112a. When this process is completed, the process proceeds to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c matches the checksum calculated in step S17. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S21; if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area), the process proceeds to step S22.

If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that this is the first time the power has been turned on or that the power has been restored irregularly as described above, and the checksum is determined to be abnormal, and processing proceeds to step S22.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S23, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing. Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and performs processing to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute an irrecoverable error notification indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (there is no transition to game control), and it cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error will not be released even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation; it is necessary to turn the power switch ON while performing a setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from the various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Irrecoverable error notification" refers to displaying an irrecoverable error screen ("This is an irrecoverable error. Please change the settings.") on the image display device to make the user aware that an irrecoverable error has occurred, or turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a specified light color (e.g. red) until the power is turned off, or outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("This is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform RWM clearing, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process in step S24. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything other than the setting value area of the main RAM 110c) based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (various solenoids) that are provided in the board unit 500 and that are activated by the main control board 110 as the game progresses, for a predetermined period of time.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, the non-time-saving game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S33. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification indicating that the game control state has been initialized.

A "power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the image display device when the power is turned on to let the player know that the game control state has been initialized, turning on the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g. white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S28 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S30 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S28. Specifically, the setting values saved in the setting value (during gameplay) area of the main RAM 110c are displayed on the information display 113, and the setting key switch 112a is operated to end confirmation of the setting values.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process for initializing the various drive sources (various solenoids) described above for a predetermined period of time. The initial operation of the various drive sources will be described in detail later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area when power is restored, such as by clearing (clearing to 0) the checksum saved in the main RAM 110c. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end setting confirmation notifications, etc., and execute a power restoration notification indicating that the game control state has returned to the state before the power outage.

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen on the image display device for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to notify the user that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, turning on all of the frame lighting devices 10 and board lighting devices 74 in a predetermined light color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), or outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate that power has been restored (from a power outage).

In step S32, the main CPU 110a sends other commands (such as a special symbol storage command and a normal symbol storage command, which will be described later) to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the number of special symbols on hold, and also performs processing to display the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the image display device.

In step S33, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 130 before the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special pattern begins to change, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S34, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S35, it starts controlling the progress of the game (timer interrupt of the main control board 110) by allowing all interrupts, and ends this initial setting process.

In other words, from when the gaming machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a pre-start state before game progress control begins, and after the initial setting process is completed, the machine is in a playable state in which game progress control is performed.

In this way, when the setting is being changed (in setting change mode) or when the setting is being confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to know that the setting is being changed on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1 by checking the status confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, and the board lighting device 74, and it is possible to know that the setting is being changed on the back (rear side) by checking the information display 113. In other words, it is possible to know whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

The power-on command and power restoration command are transmitted together with information indicating the current game status. However, after transmitting the power-on command or power restoration command, a game status command indicating the current game status may be transmitted.

Also, by not judging whether the setting change in progress flag is set or not, unrecoverable error processing may be prevented even if the previous power outage occurred during a setting change.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 8. Fig. 8 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process in the main control board 110.

This timer interrupt process is executed after the main processing initialization process is completed, by inputting a clock pulse at a predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from the reset clock pulse generating circuit provided on the main control board 110, and controls the progress of the game.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters, such as the stop time of special symbols and the opening time of special electric roles.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific random number value update process in step S120. Specifically, the random number value for determining a big win, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern are updated. Specifically, the process is performed to update each random number value and the random number counter by adding +1. Note that if the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one revolution), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the revolution, the corresponding initial random number value is set as the new initial value for the revolution, and the random number value is updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process. Specifically, similar to step S30, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the initial random number value for determining a big win, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol.

The main CPU 110a performs input control processing in step S200. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the first large winning hole detection switch 50a, the second large winning hole detection switch 56a, the first starting hole A detection switch 45a, the first starting hole B detection switch 46a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, and the specific area detection switch 53a, and performs processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. Details of the input control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electricity control processing in step S300. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing such as judging the special symbol judgment information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole A45, the first start hole B46, or the second start hole 47, displaying the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, opening and closing the large prize hole (first large prize hole 50, second large prize hole 56), setting the game state, etc. The details of the special symbol special electricity control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol/normal power control processing in step S400. Specifically, it performs processing such as judging the normal symbol judgment information acquired based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol gate 44, displaying the normal symbol fluctuations, and opening and closing the entrance opening/closing member 48d of the conversion mechanism unit 48 (auxiliary play). The details of the normal symbol/normal power control processing will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs payout control processing in step S500. Specifically, it refers to various prize ball counters stored in the main RAM 110c, and performs processing to send payout number designation commands corresponding to the various winning ports (general winning port 43, first starting port A45, first starting port B46, second starting port 47, first large winning port 50, second large winning port 56) to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

The main CPU 110a performs an abnormality determination process in step S600. Specifically, it determines whether various errors (illegal winning errors such as a game ball winning the first start port B46 or the second start port 47 when not in auxiliary play, or a game ball winning the first large winning port 50 or the second large winning port 56 when not in jackpot play, an abnormal winning error in which the number of game balls winning the various winning ports does not match the number of game balls discharged from the winning ball flow path through which the winning balls flow down, a magnetic error in which the magnetic detection sensor 57a detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time, a radio wave error in which the radio wave detection sensor 58a detects abnormal radio waves for a predetermined period of time, a door opening error in which the opening detection switch 31a changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and an operation error in which the RWM clear switch 111a or the setting key switch 112a is operated while the game progress control is being performed) have occurred, and performs processing to transmit an error designation command corresponding to the error that has occurred to the performance control board 130. This causes the performance control board 130 to execute processing to notify the error.

The main CPU 110a performs data creation processing in step S700. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to create operation data to be output to the inlet opening/closing solenoid 48h, the distribution flow path switching solenoid 48i, the first large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 50b, the flow path switching solenoid 52b, and the second large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 56b, special pattern reserved display data to be output to the first special pattern display 60, the second special pattern display 61, the normal pattern display 62, the first special pattern reserved display 63, and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and display data to be output to the normal pattern reserved display 65, etc.

In step S720, the main CPU 110a performs external information data creation processing. Specifically, it performs processing to create game information data to be output from the game information output terminal board 90.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S750. Specifically, it performs port output processing to output signals such as the operation data and display data created in step S700 above, and the game information data created in step S720 above, and performs processing to send a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and to send a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described later. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control to pay out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs processing when an information program is called. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved to the main RAM 110c, and processing is performed to call the target information program using the CALL command.

The main CPU 110a performs a game ball counting process in step S810. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to count game performance information such as the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, start winning port, and large winning port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 39a regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game performance information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be used to understand the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs a normal base value calculation process in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value (calculated as (normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current play section, which is divided by the total number of outs, is calculated, and the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place is saved in the first area of the base memory area set in the main RAM 110c.

The play section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base memory area is provided with a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the normal base values for four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four play intervals calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing in step S880. Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S870 above.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing for returning to the game program. Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to return the flag register from the main RAM 110c, permit interrupts, and return to the game program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

In this way, in the pre-start state before game progress control begins (during setting change mode, RWM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode), timer interrupts are not executed, so the number of payouts and outs are not counted, the normal base value is not calculated, and the normal base value is not displayed, which reduces the control burden on the main control board.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a flow chart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S210, the main CPU 110a performs general winning hole detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general winning hole 43, and then performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening detection switch input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first large prize opening detection switch 50a or the second large prize opening detection switch 56a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the first large prize opening 50 or the second large prize opening 56, and then performs a process to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole A detection switch 45a or the first start hole B detection switch 46a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the first start hole A45 or the first start hole B46, and performs a process to pay out the prize ball from the payout device 95, as well as a process to obtain and store special chart determination information. The details of the first start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second start hole detection switch input processing in step S240. Specifically, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 47, and performs processing to pay out prize balls from the payout device 95, as well as processing to obtain and store special game determination information. Details of the second start hole detection switch input processing will be described later.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44, and performs processing to obtain and store normal gate determination information.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs specific area detection switch input processing and ends the current input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the specific area 53, and performs processing to set predetermined data. Details of the specific area detection switch input processing will be described later.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 10. Fig. 10 is a flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal has been input from the first start port A detection switch 45a or the first start port B detection switch 46a. If a detection signal has been input from the first start port A detection switch 45a or the first start port B detection switch 46a, the process proceeds to step S230-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the first start port A detection switch 45a or the first start port B detection switch 46a, the current first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for the 3 prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4. If the first reserved number (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the first reserved number (U1) to update it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the first special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the first special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S230-3 in the available storage unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a judges whether or not the current state is normal gameplay or special 1 time reduction (second to fourth time reduction game states). If the current state is normal gameplay or special 1 time reduction (second to fourth time reduction game states), the process proceeds to step S230-9 to perform pre-reading processing of the special chart determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole A45. If the current state is not normal gameplay or special 1 time reduction (second to fourth time reduction game states) (if the current state is special 2 time reduction (first time reduction game state)), the process does not perform pre-reading processing (pre-determination) of the special chart determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole A45 or the first start hole B46, and ends the current first start hole detection switch input process.

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead process (pre-determination process) in step S230-9. In this first look-ahead process, a pre-determination table (see FIG. 21(a) or FIG. 21(d)) is selected for looking ahead (pre-determination) of the special pattern determination information, and the currently acquired special pattern determination information is pre-determined before the first special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a first look-ahead designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern planned variation pattern). The pre-determination table will be described in detail later.

This "first look-ahead specification command" is information that can identify the planned variation pattern of the special symbol, so the performance control board 130 can use the first look-ahead specification command to specify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game or small jackpot game (number of rounds), and the number of times (J1, J2, Z) that the time-saving game will be played in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first pre-reading designation command generated in step S230-9 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the first pre-reading winning designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a pre-reading notice (continuous notice display, icon change display) is executed, which gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more display changes, even before the first special symbol corresponding to the first pre-reading designation command starts to change.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the first reserved number (U1) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the second reserved number. Furthermore, the first reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the first special pattern determination information storage area.

(Main control board second start port detection switch input processing)
The second start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 11. Fig. 11 is a flowchart showing the second start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a. If a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the process proceeds to step S240-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the current second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the two prize ball counter used for two prize balls by adding data indicating two prize balls, and in step S240-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second reserved number (U2) is less than 4. If the second reserved number (U2) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S240-5, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second reserved number (U2) to update it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, sets a second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the second special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) is displayed on the image display device.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a searches for available storage units in the second special pattern determination information storage area, starting from the first storage unit, and stores the special pattern determination information acquired in step S240-3 in an available storage unit.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the special 2 time-saving state (first time-saving game state). If the current state is the special 2 time-saving state, the process proceeds to step S240-9 to perform a pre-reading process of the special chart determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the second start hole 47, and if the current state is not the special 2 time-saving state (if the current state is the normal game state or the special 1 time-saving state), the process ends the current second start hole detection switch input process as the pre-reading process of the special chart determination information obtained based on the winning of the game ball into the second start hole 47 is not performed.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a performs a second look-ahead process (pre-determination process). In this second look-ahead process, a pre-determination table (see FIG. 21(b) and FIG. 21(c)) is selected for looking ahead (pre-determination) the special pattern determination information, the currently acquired special pattern determination information is pre-determined before the second special pattern variation display is performed, and a process is performed to generate a second look-ahead designation command for notifying the performance control board 130 of the result of the pre-determination (special pattern planned variation pattern, look-ahead information).

This "second look-ahead specification command" is information that can identify the result of the special symbol determination information, so the performance control board 130 can use the second look-ahead specification command to identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, the type of jackpot game or small jackpot game (number of rounds), and the number of times various time-saving plays (J1, J2, Z) will be played in the normal time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends.

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a sets the second pre-reading designation command generated in step S240-9 above in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c.

As a result, the second look-ahead command is sent to the performance control board 130, and a look-ahead notice (continuous notice performance, icon change performance) is executed, which gives the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be played over one or more display changes, even before the second special symbol corresponding to the second look-ahead command starts to change.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the second reserved number (U2) is "4", but it may be more or less than this. Also, the upper limit of the second reserved number may be less than the upper limit of the first reserved number. Furthermore, the second reserved memory itself may be eliminated by storing the special pattern determination information only in the 0th memory section of the second special pattern determination information storage area.

(Specific area detection switch input processing on main control board)
Specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 12. Fig. 12 is a flow chart showing specific area detection switch input processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S260-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a. If a detection signal has been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, the process proceeds to step S260-2. If a detection signal has not been input from the specific area detection switch 53a, the current specific area detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S260-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is a specific area valid period during which the passage of the gaming ball into the specific area 53 is valid. Specifically, it determines whether or not a small win game (conversion game) is in progress. If a small win game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S260-3, and if a small win game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S260-5.

In step S260-3, the main CPU 110a sets in the main RAM 110c a specific area passing flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during a small win game, and specific area passing game state information indicating the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 (information indicating that the game state is normal if the current game state is normal, and information indicating that the game state is time-limited if the current game state is time-limited), and in step S260-4, sets in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c a specific area passing designation command indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during a small win game, and ends this specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passage designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and a passing notification presentation is executed to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 (a big win game is being executed). This allows the player to know that the game ball has passed through the specific area 53 during a small win game, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In step S260-5, the main CPU 110a sets a specific area passage error designation command, indicating that the game ball passed through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing, in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this specific area detection switch input process.

As a result, a specific area passing error designation command is sent to the presentation control board 130, and a passing error notification presentation is executed to notify the occurrence of a passing error in which the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at an abnormal timing. This allows the employees of the game establishment to recognize the occurrence of a passing error and take appropriate measures.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 13. Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern special electric control process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special pattern special electric processing data = 0, a special pattern memory determination process (step S310) is executed to perform processing to start the variable display of the special pattern based on the pending memory (special pattern determination information) and processing to change the special pattern special electric processing data to "1", etc.
If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, a special pattern change process (step S320) is executed to perform processes such as stopping the display of the special pattern as the change time passes and sending a pattern confirmation command to the performance control board 130 and changing the special pattern special electric processing data to "2".
If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, then as the stop time of the special symbol elapses, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", if it is a big win special symbol, the opening time of the big win game is set and the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "3", and if it is a small win special symbol, the opening time of the small win game is set and the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "4", a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, a jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to perform processing to execute a jackpot game and processing to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "5" based on the end of the final round of play.
If the special chart special electric processing data = 4, a small win game process (step S350) is executed to perform processing to execute a small win game and processing to change the special chart special electric processing data to "0" or "3" based on the completion of the ending of the small win game.
If the special chart special electric processing data = 5, a jackpot game end process (step S360) is executed to perform processes such as ending the jackpot game and changing the special chart special electric processing data to "0" based on the completion of the ending of the jackpot game.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 14. Fig. 14 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol memory determination process, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater. If the second reserved number (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-3, and if the second reserved number (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special pattern determination information storage area, shifting the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater. If the first reserved number (U1) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-5, and if the first reserved number (U1) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310-6. This causes the special symbol storage designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the image display device and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, special symbol reserved display data indicating the first reserved number (U1) and the second reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted in priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second reserved number is subtracted in priority over the first reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole (the first reserved number and the second reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first reserved number is subtracted in priority over the second reserved number).

In step S311, the main CPU 110a executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached and the special symbol stop data for the special symbol based on the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the big win determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed in a stopped state as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process to determine the change pattern (change time) of the special pattern based on the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area. The details of the special pattern change pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special pattern change pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance performed during the special pattern change display.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S800, thereby displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. Note that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbol changing display and special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirement may also include that the normal symbol changing display and auxiliary game are not being executed.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this special symbol memory determination process. This causes the customer waiting state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demo performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board jackpot determination process)
The big win determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 15. Fig. 15 is a flow chart showing the big win determination process in the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the setting value stored in the setting value area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-2, selects a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached (or whether or not a small jackpot has been reached). Details of the jackpot determination table will be described later.

In step S311-3, the main CPU 110a compares the current setting value and the random number value for determining a jackpot with the jackpot determination table to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred. If a jackpot has occurred, the process proceeds to step S311-4. If a jackpot has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S311-6.

In step S311-4, the main CPU 110a sets the game status information at the time of winning the jackpot in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S311-5, selects a special jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 17(a)) for determining the type of special jackpot symbol, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special jackpot symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a compares the random number value for determining a big win with a big win determination table to determine whether or not it is a small win. If it is a small win, the process proceeds to step S311-7. If it is not a small win, the process proceeds to step S311-8, assuming that it is a miss.

In step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for small wins (see FIG. 17(b)) for determining the type of special symbol for small wins, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special symbol determination table for small wins will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a compares the random number value for determining a jackpot with a jackpot determination table to determine whether or not it is a special miss (sudden time-saving). If it is a special miss (sudden time-saving), the process proceeds to step S311-9, and if it is a normal miss that is not a special miss (sudden time-saving), the process proceeds to step S311-10.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for special misses (see FIG. 17(c)) for determining the type of special symbol for special misses, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special symbol determination table for special misses will be described later.

In step S311-8, the main CPU 110a selects the special symbol determination table for normal misses (see FIG. 17(d)) for determining the special symbol for normal misses, and proceeds to step S311-11. Details of the special symbol determination table for normal misses will be described later.

In step S311-11, the main CPU 110a compares the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) for which a jackpot determination is to be made and the random number value for special symbol determination with the special symbol determination table to determine the special symbol that will be displayed as a result of the variable display performed on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S311-12, the main CPU 110a sets the special stop symbol data corresponding to the special symbol determined in step S311-9 in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this jackpot determination process.

In this way, when a special miss (sudden time-saving) is won, the special miss symbol is determined from the special symbol determination table for special misses (sudden time-saving). This makes it possible to distinguish it from a normal miss, and when the special miss symbol stops and is displayed, the player can be informed that the fourth time-saving game state will occur, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Big win determination table)
Figure 16 (a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (sinking) of a gaming ball into the first starting hole A45 or the first starting hole B46, and Figure 16 (b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (sinking) of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 16(a) and 16(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the determination result (jackpot, small win, special miss, normal miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" and a "small win."

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 16(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 17(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot," "small jackpot," "special miss," or "normal miss" based on the current setting value and the random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 16(b), when the set value is "1", 200 random numbers for jackpot determination from "100" to "299" are determined as "jackpots", 20,000 random numbers for jackpot determination from "10,000" to "29,999" are determined as "small wins", and the rest are determined as "special misses".

The first feature of the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the jackpot determination for the first special symbol is not determined as a "small win" or a "special miss", but the jackpot determination for the second special symbol is determined as a "small win" or a "special miss". By doing this, it is possible to differentiate the gameplay when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner from when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that in the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, even if it is not a "big win" or "small win", it is never determined to be a "normal miss" but is always determined to be a "special miss (sudden time reduction)". By doing this, when the variable display of the second special symbol is made, the player is always given some kind of game value (benefit), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Special symbol determination table)
Figure 17(a) is a special pattern determination table for big wins that is referred to when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a big win is determined, Figure 17(b) is a special pattern determination table for small wins that is referred to when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a small win is determined, Figure 17(c) is a special pattern determination table for special misses that is referred to when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a special miss (sudden time reduction) is determined, and Figure 17(d) is a special pattern determination table for normal misses that is referred to when determining the stopping pattern of the special pattern when a normal miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 17(a) to 17(d), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol that determines the stop symbol, the random number value for special symbol determination, the result of the special symbol determination, the stop special symbol data indicating the result of this determination, and the special symbol designation command indicating the result of the special symbol determination, and for reference, the lighting state of the LED in the special symbol display is described in the rightmost column.

The special symbol "00" is a normal miss special symbol that does not trigger a jackpot game. The special symbol "01" is a special jackpot symbol that triggers a first jackpot game consisting of two rounds of play, the special symbol "02" is a special jackpot symbol that triggers a second jackpot game consisting of two rounds of play, the special symbol "03" is a special jackpot symbol that triggers a third jackpot game consisting of two rounds of play, and the special symbol "11" is a special jackpot symbol that triggers a fourth jackpot game consisting of ten rounds of play.

The special symbol "13" is a special small win symbol that executes the first small win game, the special symbol "14" is a special small win symbol that executes the second small win game, and the special symbol "15" is a special small win symbol that executes the third small win game. The special symbols "30" and "31" are special miss symbols that can generate a fourth time-saving game state without executing a big win game.

Details will be given later, but when the game state after the end of the jackpot game is taken into consideration, the degree of advantage of each type of jackpot game is 2nd jackpot game < 3rd jackpot game < 1st jackpot game < 4th jackpot game.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17 is that the types of big win special symbols, small win special symbols, special miss special symbols, and normal miss special symbols are the same and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay does not become too complicated, and players can play with peace of mind. Note that at least one of the big win special symbols and small win special symbols may be one type.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17 is that the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when a normal miss special symbol is displayed is smaller than the number of LEDs (light-emitting components) of the special symbol display that are lit when a special miss special symbol is displayed. This makes it easier to understand the type of special symbol being displayed, making the game more interesting.

A third feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17 is that when the special symbol determination information (first special symbol) obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole A45 or the first start hole B46 is determined to be a jackpot (first result), any of the first to third jackpot games can be played, and when the special symbol determination information (second special symbol) obtained based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second start hole 47 is determined to be a jackpot (first result), any of the fourth jackpot games can be played. In this way, the type of jackpot game that can be played changes depending on the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The jackpot determination table for the first special symbol does not allow a small jackpot to be won, but it may be set so that a small jackpot can be won. In this case, it is preferable to set the probability of winning lower than that of the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

(Main control board special chart variation pattern determination process)
The special pattern variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing the special pattern variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game state is normal. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step S313-2. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step S313-3, assuming that the current game state is time-saving.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a normal special pattern change determination table (see FIG. 19(a)) for determining the special pattern change pattern in the normal game state, and proceeds to step S313-4. Details of the normal special pattern change determination table will be described later.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects the relevant table (matching the game situation) from the time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figures 19(b), 19(c), 20(a), and 20(b)) for determining the special chart fluctuation pattern in the time-saving game state, and moves the process to step S313-4. Details of the time-saving special chart fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a compares the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random number value for reach determination, the reserved number (U1 or U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination against the special symbol variation pattern determination table to determine the special symbol variation pattern.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the change time corresponding to the determined special chart change pattern in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets a special chart change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined change pattern in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special chart change pattern designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a increments by +1 the number of times the special symbol has changed since the specified condition was met (RWM cleared, the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game was cleared to 0), which is stored in the main RAM 110c. Note that the number of times the special symbol has changed is incremented by +1 regardless of whether the game is in normal play or time-saving play. Note that this number of times the special symbol has changed is referenced in the special symbol change process, which will be described later.

In step S313-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in a time-saving game state. If the game is not in a time-saving game state, the current special chart variation pattern determination table is terminated, and if the game is in a time-saving game state, in step S313-9, a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times (J1, J2, Z) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the time-saving number designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the remaining number of time-saving times is notified. When this process is completed, the current special chart variation pattern determination process is terminated.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table)
19 to 20 are special symbol variation pattern determination tables that are referenced when determining the variation pattern of special symbols.

Specifically, FIG. 19(a) is a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the normal game state, FIG. 19(b) is a first time-saving special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 that is referenced when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the first time-saving game state (challenge mode, rush mode described later), FIG. 19(c) is a first time-saving special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 2 that is referenced when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the first time-saving game state (legend mode described later), FIG. 20(a) is a second time-saving special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time-saving and third time-saving game states that is referenced when determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in the second time-saving and third time-saving game states (homecoming mode described later), and FIG. 20(b) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the fourth time-saving game state (special 2 remaining reserve after the end of special 2 time-saving or homecoming mode described later).

As shown in Figures 19 and 20, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole) that performs the fluctuation display, the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the special symbol determination (stop special symbol data), a random number value for reach determination, the first reserved number (U1) or the second reserved number (U2), a random number value for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern, the special symbol fluctuation pattern as the determination result, and the fluctuation time of the special symbol, and for reference, the contents of the performance that can be executed in the fluctuation performance are listed.

Therefore, a "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be capable of identifying at least the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, as will be described in detail later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot game or small jackpot game. In addition, since the number of times the time-saving game state (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of a jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the number of time-saving times.

The effects shown in the special pattern change pattern determination table shown in Figures 19 to 20, "normal change," "shortened change," and "ultra-shortened change," mean that the three effect patterns 70a change independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

"Reach" refers to a variation mode that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other performance symbols 70a change. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot (jackpot result mode), the same performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbols 70a change in the center area.

"Temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a sways slightly or deforms slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

"Normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a fluctuates in the center area, and is the reach effect with the lowest expectation of a jackpot. Note that in this embodiment, a "normal reach" does not result in a jackpot, but it may be configured so that a jackpot occurs with a "normal reach."

An "SP reach" is a super reach effect that occurs after a normal reach effect and has a higher chance of winning than a normal reach effect.
"SP Reach + "7"Promotion" refers to a performance in which the performance pattern 70a is promoted to the combination "777" in a re-draw performance that is executed after the SP Reach performance is executed and the combination of performance patterns 70a that will result in a jackpot is displayed.

An "SPSP reach" is a special reach that occurs after a normal reach or SP reach and has a higher chance of winning than an SP reach. For example, the three performance symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the image display device, using almost the entire display area of the image display device to create a more special performance than an "SP reach."

The "Full Rotation Reach" is a reach effect that is performed after a normal reach effect or a super reach effect and guarantees a big win. For example, from a blackout effect, all three performance symbols 70a are the same and move slowly, creating a more special effect than the "SPSP Reach" using almost the entire display area of the image display device, and finally displaying the "7" performance symbols 70a in a line.

The "chance effect" is when the shutter image closes without a reach effect, and a text image saying "Chance approaching" is displayed, suggesting a transition to a time-saving play state (fourth time-saving play state), and in the final stage, the shutter image opens and a special effect (a time-saving transition symbol stops and is displayed) is performed, indicating a transition to a time-saving play state (fourth time-saving play state).

The "challenge failure effect" is a reach effect using an effect pattern 70a other than "7", a challenge effect is performed to try to win a big win (including via a small win), and by operating the effect button 17 in the deciding effect that is performed in the final stage, a failure effect is performed to indicate that the challenge has failed and the big win cannot be won.

The "7 Reach Challenge Failure Effect" is a effect where a reach effect is performed using the "7" effect pattern 70a, a challenge effect is performed to try to win a big win (including via a small win), and by operating the effect button 17 in the deciding effect that is performed in the final stage, a failure effect is performed to indicate that the challenge has failed and the big win cannot be won.

The "challenge success effect" is when a reach effect using effect symbols 70a other than "7" is played, a challenge effect is played to try to win a big win (including via a small win), and a success effect (an effect in which effect symbols 70a other than "7" are lined up) is played to indicate that the deciding effect played in the final stage is successful and a big win has been won.

The "7 Reach Challenge Success Effect" is a effect where a reach effect is performed using the "7" effect pattern 70a, a challenge effect is performed to try to win a big win (including via a small win), and a success effect (in which the "7" effect pattern 70a is lined up) is performed to indicate that the deciding effect performed in the final stage is successful and a big win has been won.

The "special effect" is when the shutter image closes without any reach effect, and a text image saying "BONUS approaching" is displayed, suggesting that a jackpot will be reached, and then in the final stage, the shutter image opens and a special effect (a performance pattern 70a other than "7" is lined up) is displayed to indicate that a jackpot has been won.

The "V Stock Consumption Effect" refers to a effect in which, in the Legend Mode, which is entered when the "7" effect symbol 70a is lined up and a jackpot game is executed, effectively guaranteeing two jackpot games (V Stock), a consumption effect is performed (an effect in which the effect symbol 70a other than "7" is lined up without going through the normal reach effect) suggesting that the one guaranteed jackpot game (V Stock) will be consumed.

The "V Stock Consumption 7 Lineup Presentation" refers to a presentation in Legend Mode that is entered when the "7" presentation symbol 70a is lined up and a jackpot game is executed, effectively guaranteeing two jackpot games (V Stock), and a consumption presentation is presented that suggests that one guaranteed jackpot game (V Stock) will be consumed (a presentation in which the "7" presentation symbol 70a is lined up without going through a normal reach presentation).

Note that for the "V stock consumption effect" and "V stock consumption 7-line effect", a special reach effect is executed that does not go through the normal reach effect, but it may also be an effect in which the effect pattern 70a lines up without executing the reach effect.

The first feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 19 to 20 is that when a special miss (sudden time reduction) occurs during normal play, the game transitions to the fourth time reduction play state, and a chance effect is executed, suggesting that the result will be favorable to the player. This effectively builds up the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 19 to 20 is that when a special miss (sudden time reduction) occurs during time-saving play, the game is not controlled to a new time-saving play state, and a normal variation effect or a failed challenge effect is executed, suggesting that the result will be unfavorable to the player. This prevents the player from having false expectations, making it possible to increase the fun of the game.

The third feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 19 to 20 is that in the legend mode, which is entered when the "7" performance symbol 70a is lined up and a jackpot game is executed, effectively guaranteeing two jackpot games (V stock), if the result is favorable to the player (jackpot or small win), a V stock consumption performance is executed to consume the essentially guaranteed jackpot game (V stock). This allows the player to play with a sense of security, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 21 is a pre-determination table that is referenced when pre-determining (reading ahead) special chart determination information obtained based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole.

Specifically, FIG. 21(a) is a normal pre-judgment table that is referenced when pre-judging the special chart judgment information in the normal game state, FIG. 21(b) is pre-judgment table 1 for the first time-saving (special 2 time-saving) that is referenced when pre-judging the special chart judgment information in the first time-saving game state (challenge mode, rush mode described later), FIG. 21(c) is pre-judgment table 2 for the first time-saving (special 2 time-saving) that is referenced when pre-judging the special chart judgment information in the first time-saving game state (legend mode described later), and FIG. 21(d) is a pre-judgment table for the second to fourth time-saving (special 1 time-saving) that is referenced when pre-judging the special chart judgment information in the second to fourth time-saving game states (special 1 time-saving).

As shown in FIG. 21, the advance judgment table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole), the judgment result of the jackpot judgment (random number value for jackpot judgment), the judgment result of the special symbol (random number value for special symbol judgment), the random number value for reach judgment, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment, the planned special symbol fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the look-ahead information corresponding to the planned special symbol fluctuation pattern, and for reference, the performance contents that can be executed in the fluctuation performance are listed.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" and "preview information" can be said to be capable of identifying at least the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the planned special symbol change pattern. In addition, as will be described in detail later, since a jackpot game or a small jackpot game is executed depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the type (number of rounds) of a jackpot game or a small jackpot game. In addition, since the number of time-saving game states (time-saving number of times) is set at the end of a jackpot game depending on the type of special symbol, it can also be said to be capable of identifying the number of time-saving number of times.

(Special pattern change processing on the main control board)
The special symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 22. Fig. 22 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the change time set in the special symbol change pattern determination process described above has elapsed. If the change time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S320-2, and if the change time has not elapsed, the current special symbol change process is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process described above, and in step S320-3, sets the stop time according to the game status in a specified area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether a time-saving flag (any of the first to fourth time-saving flags) is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time-saving flag is set, the process proceeds to step S320-5 to update the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S320-14 to not update the remaining number of time-saving times.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current variable display of the special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol, which is the number of time-saving times for the special 1 symbol (J1) saved in the main RAM 110c, is decremented by one. If it is not the first special symbol (if it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol, which is the number of time-saving times for the special 2 symbol (J2) saved in the main RAM 110c, is decremented by one.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of special 1 time-saving times (J1) or the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) has become "0." If it has become "0," the process moves to step S320-12 to end the time-saving game state, and if it has not become "0," the process moves to step S320-9.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small win special symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S320-13. If it is a small win special symbol, in step S320-10, the remaining number of small wins (Z) until the time-saving game state is terminated, which is saved in the main RAM 110c, is decremented by 1.

In step S320-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the remaining number of small wins has reached "0." If the remaining number of small wins has reached "0," the time-saving game state is terminated and processing proceeds to step S320-12. If the remaining number of small wins has not reached "0," processing proceeds to step S320-13.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a clears the time-saving flags (first to fourth time-saving flags) and the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, Z) saved in the main RAM 110c to 0, thereby ending the time-saving game state.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a sets a time-saving count designation command corresponding to the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, Z) saved in the main RAM 110c in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the time-saving count designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the remaining time-saving count (special 1 time-saving count J1 for special 1 time-saving, special 2 time-saving count J2 for special 2 time-saving) is announced.

In step S320-14, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (the game state determined from the presence or absence of the time-saving flag) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 performs processing to update the game state.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special power processing data to "2" to transition to the special symbol stop processing, and ends this special symbol change processing.

In this way, if any of the various time-saving counts (J1, J2) reach "0" during the time-saving game state, in which it is easier for a game ball to enter the first start hole B46 or the second start hole 47 than in the normal game state, the time-saving game state ends even if the remaining number of small wins (Z) has not reached "0". Therefore, the time-saving game state can be ended according to the progress of the game (the execution status of the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern), making the game more interesting.

In addition, during the time-saving game state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the first start hole B46 or the second start hole 47, the remaining number of small wins (Z) becomes "0", and the time-saving game state ends even if the various time-saving numbers (J1, J2) are not "0". Therefore, even if the player tries to play advantageously (whether to pass the game ball through the specific area 53 in a small win game and aim for an advantageous jackpot) by referring to the type of special pattern (combination of performance patterns 70a) displayed in the pre-reading performance or the stop display, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage depending on the playing method during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special symbol starts to stop displaying after the variable time has elapsed, that is, when the special symbol's stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) begins, the various remaining time-saving counts are subtracted, and the time-saving game state ends when any of them becomes "0." Therefore, by speeding up the change in game state compared to ending the time-saving game state when the special symbol stops displaying (when the stop time has elapsed), it is possible to provide a more dynamic game and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the time-saving game state ends when the remaining number of small wins becomes "0" at the start of the stopped display of the small win special symbol (before the stop time has elapsed). Therefore, by speeding up the change in game state compared to ending the time-saving game state at the end of the stopped display of the small win special symbol (when the stop time has elapsed), it is possible to provide a more dynamic game and increase the interest of the game.

(Special pattern stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stop time set in the special symbol variation process described above has elapsed. If the stop time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S330-2, and if the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is terminated.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special jackpot symbol is displayed. If it is a special jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If it is not a special jackpot symbol (it is a special small jackpot symbol, a special miss symbol, or a normal miss symbol), the process proceeds to step S330-5.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot opening transition process, such as selecting jackpot game control data (maximum number of rounds, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) corresponding to the stop special symbol data (special jackpot symbol) from the jackpot game jackpot winning hole control data determination table (see FIG. 24(a)) for executing the jackpot game, and in step S330-4, sets "3" to the special symbol special power processing data in order to transition to jackpot game processing, and proceeds to step S330-8. Details of the jackpot game jackpot winning hole control data determination table will be described later.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a small win special symbol is displayed. If it is a small win special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-6. If it is not a small win special symbol (if it is a special loss special symbol or a normal loss special symbol), the process proceeds to step S330-10.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a performs a small win opening transition process, such as selecting control data (maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) for the small win game corresponding to the stop special symbol data (special small win symbol) from the large win port control data determination table for small win game (see FIG. 24(b)) for executing the small win game, and in step S330-7, sets "4" to the special symbol special power processing data to transition to the small win game, and proceeds to step S330-8. Details of the large win port control data determination table for small win game will be described later.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the selected control data in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-9, sets the opening designation command in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance of the big win game or small win game. When this processing is completed, the current special pattern stop processing ends.

In step S330-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of fluctuations saved in the main RAM 110c has reached a specified number (600 times). If it has reached the specified number, the process moves to step S320-11 to transition to the second time-shortened game state, and if it has not reached the specified number, the process moves to step S320-13 to not transition to the second time-shortened game state.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second time-saving end conditions (number of special 1 time-saving wins J1 = 850, number of special 2 time-saving wins J2 = 1, number of remaining small wins Z = 1) for the second time-saving game state in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-12, sets the second time-saving flag corresponding to the second time-saving game state. This results in a transition to the second time-saving game state.

In step S330-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special miss symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol (suddenly winning the time-saving feature). If the special miss symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is assumed that there is a possibility of transitioning to the fourth time-saving game state, and the process proceeds to step S330-14. If the special miss symbol is not displayed as a stopped symbol (the normal miss symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol), it is assumed that there will be no transition to the fourth time-saving game state, and the process proceeds to step S320-17.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently in the normal game mode. If it is in the normal game mode, the process moves to step S330-15 to transition to the fourth time-shortened game mode. If it is not in the normal game mode (if the game is in the time-shortened game mode), the process moves to step S330-18 to not transition to the fourth time-shortened game mode in order to prevent the time-shortened game mode (for example, the first time-shortened game mode) that has already occurred from being terminated midway.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 110a sets the fourth time-saving end conditions corresponding to the fourth time-saving game state according to the type of special miss special symbol (in the case of the first special miss special symbol, the number of special 1 time-saving times J1 = 50, the number of special 2 time-saving times J2 = 1, and the number of remaining small wins Z = 1; in the case of the second special miss special symbol, the number of special 1 time-saving times J1 = 100, the number of special 2 time-saving times J2 = 1, and the number of remaining small wins Z = 1) in the main RAM 110c, and in step S330-16, sets the fourth time-saving flag corresponding to the fourth time-saving game state. This results in a transition to the fourth time-saving game state.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a sets a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times (J1, J2, Z) set in the main RAM 110c in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the time-saving number designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which notifies the user of the remaining number of time-saving times.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination process, and ends this special symbol stop process.

In this way, when the number of times that the special symbol's missing variable display is executed after the first condition is met (RWM cleared) reaches a specified number of times (the specified number of times that the special symbol's variable display is a missing result), and when the number of times that the special symbol's missing variable display is executed after the second condition is met (the number of variations is cleared to 0 due to the end of a jackpot game) reaches a specified number of times (the specified number of times that the special symbol's variable display is a missing result), it is possible to generate a second time-saving game state for a specified period of time (until 850 times of the first special symbol variable display are executed). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the unexpectedness of the time-saving state occurring without going through a jackpot game, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of times (600) at which the second time-saving game state occurs is greater than the maximum number of times (100) that is set after the end of a jackpot game. This means that the second time-saving game state will not occur during the time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game, eliminating the inconvenience of players losing track of the game's progress, and making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the second time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to 0. Therefore, the second time-saving game state will not occur again between jackpot games (after the second time-saving game state starts or ends), which ensures a balance of profits between the gaming facility and the player, and also makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, when a special miss special pattern that is different from the normal miss special pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to generate a fourth time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the unexpected feeling that the time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. It is also possible to easily distinguish this from a time-saving game state that goes through a jackpot game, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the normal game state is in effect when the stop time of the special miss special pattern has elapsed as a result of the variable display of the special pattern, the fourth time-saving game state is generated, whereas if the normal game state is not in effect (the time-saving game state is in effect), the fourth time-saving game state is not generated. Therefore, the fourth time-saving game state will not be generated during the time-saving game state after the end of a big win game; specifically, a time-saving game state that has already been generated (for example, the first time-saving game state) will not be terminated midway to generate a new fourth time-saving game state, which will prevent the player from becoming confused about the progress of the game and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if a special miss special symbol that is different from the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a result of the variable display of the special symbol, the time-saving end condition is set according to the type of special miss special symbol. This makes it possible to heighten the player's expectations regarding the type of special miss special symbol, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, even if the fourth time-saving game state does not occur during the time-saving game state, the special miss symbol is displayed. Therefore, the result of the big win determination can be disclosed to the player without falsifying it, and the player can also understand the frequency with which the special miss symbol appears, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, if the conditions for the second time-saving game state and the conditions for the fourth time-saving game state are met at the same time, the fourth time-saving game state is not generated and the second time-saving game state is generated first. This results in the second time-saving game state, which is more advantageous than the fourth time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second time-saving game state and the fourth time-saving game state are also set to occur when the stopped display of the special symbol ends (when the stopped time has elapsed). Therefore, even if the time-saving game state occurs until the start of the stopped display of the special symbol (before the stopped time has elapsed), if the time-saving game state has ended at that point, a new second time-saving game state or a fourth time-saving game state can be generated, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

If the time when the special miss special symbol stops has elapsed during the time-saving game state (number of time-saving times > 0), the fourth time-saving game state is not generated so that the time-saving game state that has already occurred does not end midway. However, if the first time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state that goes through a jackpot game is in progress, the fourth time-saving game state may be generated either overlapping with the time-saving game state or in place of the time-saving game state, and if the second time-saving game state that does not go through a jackpot game is in progress, the fourth time-saving game state may not be generated.

(Control Data Table)
Figure 24(a) is a diagram showing a large prize opening control data judgment table for jackpot play for controlling the large prize opening during jackpot play (special play), Figure 24(b) is a diagram showing a large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize play for controlling the large prize opening during small prize play, and Figure 24(c) is a diagram showing a specific area control data judgment table for small prize play for controlling a specific area during small prize play.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the big prize opening control data judgment table for big prize play corresponds to the special stop pattern data, the maximum number of rounds in a big prize play, the maximum number of winning balls in a big prize opening in one round play, the opening time from the start of a big prize play until the first round play is executed, the type of big prize opening that opens in each round play, the maximum number of openings of the big prize opening in each round play, the opening time of the big prize opening for one opening of each round play, the interval time during which the big prize opening is closed after the end of a round play (the time required to eject the game balls from the big prize opening), and the ending time from the end of the final round play until the end of the big prize play.

When the special stop data is "01", a first jackpot game in which two rounds of play are played is executed, when the special stop data is "02", a second jackpot game in which two rounds of play are played is executed, when the special stop data is "03", a third jackpot game in which two rounds of play are played, and when the special stop data is "11", a fourth jackpot game in which ten rounds of play are played is executed.

In addition, if the stop special data is "13", a first V jackpot game is executed in which the remaining nine rounds of play are played via a first small jackpot game, which is the first round of play; if the stop special data is "14", a second V jackpot game is executed in which the remaining nine rounds of play are played via a second small jackpot game, which is the first round of play; and if the stop special data is "15", a third V jackpot game is executed in which the remaining one round of play is played via a third small jackpot game, which is the first round of play.

The big prize winning hole control data judgment table for big prize games shown in FIG. 24(a) has the following features: when a big prize game (first to third big prize games) based on winning at the first start hole A45 or the first start hole B46 is played, the maximum number of rounds (10 rounds) of big prize games are not played, whereas when a big prize game (fourth to fifth big prize games) based on winning at the second start hole 47 is played, the maximum number of rounds (10 rounds) of big prize games can be played. By doing this, it is possible to make the gameplay different between when a game ball wins at the first start hole A45 or the first start hole B46 and when a game ball wins at the second start hole 47, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), the large prize opening control data judgment table for small prize games associates the special stop data of the special pattern (type of small prize game), the maximum number of times the large prize opening can be opened in a small prize game, the maximum number of prizes won into the large prize opening in a small prize game, the opening time until the large prize opening is converted to an open state, the type of large prize opening to be opened, the opening time of the large prize opening for one opening, the interval time during which the large prize opening is closed (the time required to eject the game balls from the large prize opening), and the ending time from the final closure of the large prize opening to the end of the small prize game.

If the stop special data is "13", the first small win game is executed, if the stop special data is "14", the second small win game is executed, and if the stop special data is "15", the third small win game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 24(c), the specific area control data judgment table for small win games associates the special stop data of the special pattern (type of small win game), the maximum number of times the specific area 53 opens in a small win game, the opening timing of the specific area 53, and the closing timing of the specific area 53.

In a small win game, regardless of the type of small win game, the specific area 53 is converted to an open state when the large prize winning opening is opened for the first time in the small win game, and the specific area 53 is converted to a closed state when the large prize winning opening is closed for the final time.

The specific area control data judgment table for small win games shown in FIG. 24(c) has the following feature: the timing for opening and closing the specific area 53 is set so that a game ball that enters the first large winning port 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of nearly 100% (1/1). This allows the player to play the small win game with peace of mind, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, instead of opening and closing the specific area 53 so that the game ball that enters the first large winning port 50 during a small win game passes through the specific area 53 with a probability of almost 100% (1/1), the specific area 53 may be opened and closed with a probability of 50% (1/2) or 25% (1/4).

In addition, depending on the type of small prize game, there may be a case where the specific area 53 is opened or closed so that a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 has a probability of passing through the specific area 53 of approximately 100% (1/1) (e.g., second small prize game), and a case where the specific area 53 is opened or closed so that a game ball that has entered the first large prize opening 50 has a probability of passing through the specific area 53 of 25% (1/4) (e.g., third small prize game).

(Jackpot Game Processing on the Main Control Board)
The big win game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing the big win game processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-5.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-3. If the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated.

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a round play transition process. Specifically, it adds "1" to the number of round play times (R) stored in the main RAM 110c, and sets a round in progress flag in the main RAM 110c to indicate that a round play is in progress.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds played (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the round designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a round performance corresponding to the current round of play.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a round of play is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not a round-in-progress flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If a round of play is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-6. If a round of play is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-12.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the time elapsed since the start of the current round of play has reached the timing for opening the large prize opening specified by the control data for the large prize game. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met, the process proceeds to step S340-7. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have not been met, the process proceeds to step S340-8.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening process in step S340-7. Specifically, it identifies the type of large prize opening to be opened (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) and the opening time of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the large prize game, and sets the opening time of the large prize opening and the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid (first large prize opening opening solenoid 50b or second large prize opening opening solenoid 56b) in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening into an open state.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the current opening of the large prize opening is the opening before the final opening in the current round of play, and whether that opening time has elapsed. If the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met, processing proceeds to step S340-9, and if the conditions for closing the large prize opening have not been met, processing proceeds to step S340-10.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening closing process in step S340-9. Specifically, it identifies the interval time (closing time) of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the large prize game, sets the interval time (closing time) of the large prize opening in the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening opening/closing solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening to a closed state.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the condition for transitioning to an interval has been met. Specifically, it determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) in the current round of play has reached the maximum number of winning balls or whether the opening time for the final opening of the large prize opening in the current round of play has elapsed. If the condition for transitioning to an interval has been met, processing proceeds to step S340-11, and if the condition for transitioning to an interval has not been met, processing for the current large prize game is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs interval transition processing in step S340-11. Specifically, it identifies the current interval time (the time when the large prize opening is closed) from the control data for the large prize game, sets the interval time in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening into a closed state. It also sets an interval in progress flag, indicating that an interval is in progress, in place of the round in progress flag stored in the main RAM 110c. When the interval transition processing is completed, the current large prize game processing is terminated.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current time is during an interval. Specifically, it determines whether or not an interval flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the current time is during an interval, the process proceeds to step S340-13. If the current time is not during an interval, the process proceeds to step S340-19.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the interval time has elapsed. If the interval time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-14. If the interval time has not elapsed, the process for this jackpot game ends.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final round of play in the current jackpot game has ended. If the final round of play has ended, the process proceeds to step S340-17. If the final round of play has not ended, the process proceeds to step S340-15.

The main CPU 110a performs a round play transition process in step S340-15. Specifically, it adds "1" to the number of round play times (R) stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It also sets a round play in progress flag in place of the interval in progress flag stored in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds played (R) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the round designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a round performance corresponding to the current round of play.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S340-17. Specifically, it identifies the current ending time from the control data for the big win game, and sets the ending time in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. It also sets an ending in progress flag, indicating that the ending is in progress, in place of the interval in progress flag stored in the main RAM 110c.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that this is the ending of the jackpot game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current jackpot game processing. This causes the ending designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute the ending performance corresponding to the current jackpot game.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether the game is currently ending. Specifically, it determines whether the ending flag is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the game is currently ending, the process proceeds to step S340-20. If the game is not currently ending, the current jackpot game process ends.

In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game processing is terminated. If the ending time has elapsed, in step S340-21, the special chart special signal processing data is set to "5" to move processing to the jackpot game termination processing, and the current jackpot game processing is terminated.

(Small win game processing of the main control board)
The small win game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing the small win game ending processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening is currently in progress. Specifically, it determines whether or not the opening time set in the special symbol stop process described above is equal to or greater than "0". If the opening is in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-2, and if the opening is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S350-4.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the opening time set in the special symbol stop processing described above has elapsed. If the opening time has elapsed, in step S350-3, an open/close game in progress flag is set in the main RAM 110c to indicate that an open/close game in which the large prize opening is opened and closed is in progress, and if the opening time has not elapsed, the current small prize game processing is terminated.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special prize opening is being opened or closed. If it is being opened or closed, the process proceeds to step S350-5. If it is not being opened or closed, the process proceeds to step S350-21.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the opening or interval of the small prize game has ended. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have been met, the process proceeds to step S350-6. If the conditions for opening the large prize opening have not been met, the process proceeds to step S350-7.

The main CPU 110a performs a large prize opening process in step S350-6. Specifically, it specifies the type of large prize opening to be opened (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56) from the control data for the small prize game shown in FIG. 10(c) and the opening time of the current large prize opening (first large prize opening 50 or second large prize opening 56), and sets the opening time of the large prize opening and the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid (first large prize opening opening solenoid 50b or second large prize opening opening solenoid 56b) in the main RAM 110c. This causes the large prize opening to be converted into an open state.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for opening the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. 24(c) (here, the timing for the initial opening of the large prize opening) has arrived. If the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-8; if the conditions for opening the specific area 53 have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-9.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific area opening process in step S350-8. Specifically, the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the specific area 53 to be converted to an open state.

In step S350-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the closing conditions for the specific area 53 have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the timing for closing the specific area 53 specified by the control data for the specific area shown in FIG. 24(c) (here, the final closing timing of the large prize opening) has arrived. If the closing conditions for the specific area 53 have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-10; if the closing conditions for the specific area 53 have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-11.

The main CPU 110a performs a specific area closing process in step S350-10. Specifically, it clears the drive data for the specific area opening/closing solenoid 53b that is set in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the specific area 53 to be converted to a closed state.

In step S350-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met. Specifically, it determines whether the opening time for the large prize opening has elapsed and whether the number of prizes won through the large prize opening has reached the maximum number of prizes. If the conditions for closing the large prize opening have been met, processing proceeds to step S350-12; if the conditions for closing the large prize opening have not been met, processing proceeds to step S350-13.

The main CPU 110a performs the large prize opening closing process in step S350-12. Specifically, it identifies the interval time (closing time) from the control data for the small prize game shown in FIG. 10(c), sets the interval time for the large prize opening in the main RAM 110c, and clears the drive data for the large prize opening opening solenoid set in the main RAM 110c. This converts the large prize opening to a closed state.

In step S350-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether the final interval time in the small win game has elapsed. If the final interval time has elapsed, in step S350-14, the open/close game in progress flag set in the main RAM 110c is cleared, and if the final interval time has not elapsed, the current small win game processing is terminated.

In step S350-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the above-mentioned specific area passing flag has been saved in the main RAM 110c. If the specific area passing flag has been saved, the process proceeds to step S350-16 assuming that a jackpot game will be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the open/close game, and if the specific area passing flag has not been saved, the process proceeds to step S350-19 assuming that an ending will be executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 during the open/close game.

In step S350-16, the main CPU 110a clears the specific area passing flag saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S350-17, performs a process to transition to a jackpot game. Specifically, the main CPU 110a selects control data (maximum number of rounds, maximum number of winnings, opening time, etc.) corresponding to the stopped special symbol data (stopped special symbol) from the jackpot game jackpot prize opening control data judgment table shown in FIG. 24(a), and performs processes such as clearing the time-saving flag and various time-saving numbers (J1, J2, Z) saved in the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-18, the main CPU 110a sets the special chart special electric processing data to "3" to move processing to the big win game processing, and ends this small win game processing.

The main CPU 110a performs ending transition processing in step S350-19. Specifically, it identifies the current ending time from the control data for the small win game, and sets the ending time in the RWM area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S350-20, the main CPU 110a sets an ending designation command indicating that this is the ending of the small win game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends the current small win game processing. This causes the ending designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute an ending performance corresponding to the current small win game (such as a disappointment notification performance that notifies players that the game ball did not pass through the specific area 53 during the small win game, more specifically during the open/close game).

In step S350-21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the game is currently ending. Specifically, it determines whether or not the ending time set in step S350-19 is equal to or greater than "0". If the game is currently ending, the process proceeds to step S350-22. If the game is not currently ending, the current small win game process ends.

In step S350-22, the main CPU 110a determines whether the ending time set in step S350-19 described above has elapsed. If the ending time has not elapsed, the current small win game processing is terminated, and if the ending time has elapsed, in step S350-23, the special symbol special power processing data is set to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination processing, and then the current small win game processing is terminated.

In this way, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, the big win game will not be executed until the small win game (conversion game) ends (the first big win opening is opened ten times or ten game balls win). Therefore, the player will not be put at a disadvantage depending on the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, the big win game is executed without ending the small win game. This prevents the time between the small win game and the big win game from being prolonged, making the game more interesting. Note that the big win game may be executed after the ending of the small win game.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The big win game ending process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing the big win game ending process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S360-1, the main CPU 110a obtains the special stop symbol data saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-2, it determines whether the special stop symbol data is a special jackpot symbol. If it is a special jackpot symbol, the process proceeds to step S360-3, and if it is not a special jackpot symbol (it is a special small jackpot symbol), the process proceeds to step S360-5.

In step S360-3, the main CPU 110a acquires the game status information at the time of winning the jackpot that is saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-4, selects a first game status setting table (see FIG. 28(a)) for setting the game status after the jackpot based on the game status information at the time of winning the jackpot, and proceeds to step S360-7. Details of the first game status setting table will be described later.

In step S360-5, the main CPU 110a acquires the game state information at the time of passing the specific area saved in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-6, selects a second game state setting table (see FIG. 28(b)) for setting the game state after the big win based on the game state information at the time of passing the specific area, and proceeds to step S360-7. Details of the second game state setting table will be described later.

In step S360-7, the main CPU 110a compares the acquired game status information with the selected game status setting table, determines the game status flag, the number of time-saving turns (J1, J2), and the number of remaining small wins (Z) as the game status after the big win, and sets them in the main RAM 110c, and in step S360-8, sets a game status designation command corresponding to the game status flag in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the game status designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to update the game status is performed on the performance control board 130.

In step S360-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "0" to move processing to the special symbol memory determination process, and ends the current jackpot game end process.

In this way, at the end of a big win game that is executed when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during a small win game, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the big win game (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 110c) based on the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area during the small win game. Therefore, it is possible to control the game (set the game conditions) by utilizing events that occur during the actual game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a big win game that does not go through a small win game, it is possible to perform a predetermined process (specifically, a process of determining the game conditions after the big win game (game state, number of time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) and setting the determined game conditions in the main RAM 110c) based on the game state when it was determined to be a big win (when the variable display of the special pattern began). Therefore, it is possible to make the gameplay different depending on whether it is a big win game that goes through a small win game or a big win game that does not go through a small win game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, at the end of a big win game that does not involve a small win game, a predetermined process may be performed based on the game state when the big win special symbol is displayed, rather than performing a predetermined process based on the game state when the big win is determined.

(Game Status Setting Table)
Figure 28(a) is a diagram showing a first game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that does not involve a small win, and Figure 28(b) is a diagram showing a second game status setting table for setting the game status after the end of a jackpot game that involves a small win.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), the first game state setting table corresponds to the special stop data of the special jackpot pattern, the game state information at the time of winning the jackpot indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the number of special 1 time-saving times (J1) which is the number of times the first special pattern changes to end the time-saving game state, the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) which is the number of times the second special pattern changes to end the time-saving game state, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) which is the number of times the small win changes to end the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), the second game state setting table corresponds to the stopped special symbol data of the small win special symbol, game state information at the time of passing a specific area 53 indicating the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53, the game state flag to be set (time-saving flag indicating the time-saving game state), the special 1 time-saving number (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, the special 2 time-saving number (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, and the remaining number of small wins (Z) which is the number of times the small win changes to end the time-saving game state.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 28 is that there are small win games (a second V jackpot game from a second small win game, a third V jackpot game from a third small win game) in which the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) set when executed in a time-saving game state is greater than the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) set when executed in a normal game state. By doing this, the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) set can be made different depending on the type of small win game, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 28 is that there are jackpot games (second jackpot game, fourth jackpot game, fifth jackpot game) in which the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) set when executed in the normal game state is the same as the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) set when executed in the time-saving game state, and the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) of these jackpot games is greater than the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) of the other jackpot games (first jackpot game, third jackpot game). In this way, the value of the jackpot game can be differentiated by the number of time-saving times, rather than by the difference in the prize balls that can be acquired during the jackpot game, making it possible to improve the playability and increase the interest in the game.

The third feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 28 is that there are jackpot games (first to third jackpot games, second V jackpot game, third V jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to one, and a jackpot game (fourth jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) is set to two. In this way, there are cases where the game transitions to the normal game state when the small win special symbol is stopped and displayed once during the time-saving game state, and cases where the time-saving game state is maintained when the small win special symbol is stopped and displayed once during the time-saving game state. This makes it possible to differentiate the game state when the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the small win game state, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 28 is that there is a small win game (first V jackpot game from first jackpot game) in which the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in a normal game state is greater than the remaining number of small wins (Z) set when executed in a time-saving game state. By doing this, the remaining number of small wins (Z) set can be made different depending on the type of jackpot game, improving playability and making the game more interesting.

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game without going through a small win game)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the game state to be referred to at the end of a big win game that does not involve a small win game.

Specifically, FIG. 29(a) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal game state, FIG. 29(b) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (before the final fluctuation), and FIG. 29(c) is a timing chart when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (final fluctuation).

The game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a jackpot game that does not involve a small win game is the timing at which a jackpot is determined to have occurred (when the jackpot is won).

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving turns, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), when the jackpot fluctuation display is executed in the time-saving game state (before the final fluctuation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot fluctuation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 29(c), when the jackpot variation display is executed in the time-saving game state (final variation), at the end of the jackpot game at T4, the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving turns, number of remaining small wins) are set by referring to the game state at the start of the jackpot variation display at T1, that is, at the time when the jackpot was won. In this case, the timing of T1 is the time-saving game state.

(Game state referenced at the end of a big win game via a small win game)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a game state to be referred to at the end of a big win game via a small win game.

Specifically, FIG. 30(a) is a timing chart when a small win variation display is executed in normal game mode, FIG. 30(b) is a timing chart when a small win variation display that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition is executed in time-saving game mode, and FIG. 30(c) is a timing chart when a small win variation display that satisfies the time-saving end condition is executed in time-saving game mode.

The game state that is referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of time-saving rounds, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a big win game that has gone through a small win game is the timing when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 during the small win game (when transitioning to the big win game).

As shown in FIG. 30(a), when the small win variable display is executed in the normal game state, at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) are set. In this case, since the normal game state has been in place since the start of the small win variable display, the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 30(b), when a small win variable display that does not satisfy the time-saving end condition is executed in the time-saving game state, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced at the end of the big win game of T6, and the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, since the various time-saving number of times and the remaining number of small wins are not "0" when the small win variable display of T2 is stopped and the time-saving game state is maintained, the timing of T4 is the time-saving game state. Also, when the game ball passes through the specific area 53 at the timing of T4, the big win game starts and the game transitions to the normal game state, but the time of passing the specific area 53 is the time-saving game state before transitioning to the normal game state. This state is only reached when the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) is entered after the end of the fourth jackpot in FIG. 28, or when the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) is entered after the end of the first V jackpot game via the first small jackpot game in the normal game state.

As shown in FIG. 30(c), when a small win variable display that satisfies the time-saving end condition is executed in the time-saving game state, at the end of the big win game of T6, the game state when the game ball passed through the specific area 53 during the small win game of T4 is referenced and the game conditions (game state, various time-saving number of times, remaining number of small wins) are set. In this case, when the small win variable display of T2 stops being displayed, one of the time-saving number of times becomes "0", the time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state, so the timing of T4 is the normal game state.

As shown in Figures 29 and 30, the sampling timing (acquisition timing) of the game state referenced to set the game conditions (game state, number of various time-saving times, number of remaining small wins) at the end of a jackpot game differs between when a jackpot variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played, and when a small win variation display is executed and a jackpot game is played. Therefore, the gameplay can be made different depending on whether it is a jackpot or a small win, making the game more interesting.

(Main control board general-purpose power control processing)
31, the normal power control process of the main control board 110 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the normal power control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the normal map normal power processing data, and in step S402, references the branch destination address from the loaded normal map normal power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current normal map normal power control process.

Specifically, if the normal pattern normal electricity processing data = 0, a normal pattern change process (step S410) is executed to perform a process for executing a change display of the normal pattern based on the reserved memory (normal pattern determination information) and a process for changing the normal pattern normal electricity processing data to "1". Details of the normal pattern change process will be described later.

If the normal map/normal power processing data = 1, auxiliary game processing (step S420) is executed to execute a process for executing an auxiliary game that opens the second starting hole 47 in a predetermined manner, or to change the normal map/normal power processing data to "0", etc.

(Main control board normal pattern change processing)
The normal symbol variation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing the normal symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

In step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state. If a normal pattern is being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-12. If a normal pattern is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more. If the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S410-3, and if the number of reserved normal symbols (G) is not 1 or more, the current normal symbol change process is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a updates the number of reserved normal symbols (G) by subtracting "1", and in step S410-4, shifts the data stored in the reserved normal symbol memory area, shifting the normal symbol determination information stored in the first to fourth memory units to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special map judgment information stored in the fourth memory section of the regular map judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the regular map judgment information holding memory area. In addition, the regular map judgment information stored in the first memory section of the regular map judgment information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the regular map judgment information execution memory area, and the regular map judgment information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

The main CPU 110a performs a win determination process in step S410-5. Specifically, using a win determination table for normal symbols (see FIG. 33(a)), it determines whether or not a win has occurred based on the game state and the win determination random number value stored in the normal symbol execution memory area. Details of the win determination table for normal symbols will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs normal symbol determination processing in step S410-6. Specifically, using a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 33(b)), the stopped normal symbol data of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display is determined based on the game state, the win determination result, and the normal symbol determination random number value. The details of the normal symbol determination table will be described later.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol designation command corresponding to the type of normal symbol determined in the normal symbol determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the stop normal symbol data.

The main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in step S410-8. Specifically, using a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 33(c)) according to the game state, it determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for displaying a normal symbol in a variable manner based on the winning determination result and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value. The details of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a sets a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the normal map fluctuation pattern.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a sets the normal pattern fluctuation time corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determined in the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination process in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-11 starts the normal pattern fluctuation display and ends this normal pattern fluctuation process. As a result, LED lighting data for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display is created in the data creation process of step S700 above, and is output in the output control process of step S800 above, causing the normal pattern fluctuation display to be performed on the normal pattern display 62.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the normal pattern change time has elapsed. If the change time has not elapsed, the current normal pattern change process is terminated, and if the change time has elapsed, in step S410-13, the change display of the normal pattern is stopped, and in step S410-14, a normal pattern confirmation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the normal pattern confirmation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible to know that the normal pattern has stopped being displayed on the performance control board 130.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped normal symbol is a winning normal symbol (a winning win). If it is not a winning normal symbol, the current normal symbol variation process is terminated, and if it is a winning normal symbol, in step S410-16, auxiliary game control data for controlling the auxiliary game is obtained from the auxiliary game control table (see FIG. 33(d)). Details of the auxiliary game control table will be described later.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM. This causes the opening designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to recognize that the opening of the auxiliary game has begun.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time corresponding to the auxiliary game control data acquired in step S410-16 of the auxiliary game in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S410-19, sets the normal symbol/normal power processing data to "1", terminating this normal symbol variation process.

(Winning judgment table for normal symbols)
Figure 33 (a) is a hit determination table for normal symbols that is referenced when determining a hit based on normal symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the hit determination table for normal symbols associates the game state when a hit determination is made, the random number value for hit determination, and the result of the hit determination (win, miss), and for reference, the approximate probability of winning is listed in the rightmost column.

A "win" is a judgment result in which the auxiliary game will be executed, and a "lose" is a judgment result in which the auxiliary game will not be executed. Note that the win judgment only includes misses, and there are no special misses (sudden time reductions).

The first feature of the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 33(a) is that the probability (proportion) of a winning judgment is the same regardless of whether the game state is a non-time-saving state (normal game state) or a time-saving state (first to fourth time-saving game states). By doing this, it is possible to make players expect that the auxiliary game will be executed regardless of the game state, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

The probability (proportion) of determining a win may be higher in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state (generating a normal probability variation), and in this case, the probability of determining a win may be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state. For example, the probability of determining a win may be higher in the special time-saving 2 game state (second time-saving game state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 47 than in the special time-saving 1 game state (second to fourth time-saving game states) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the first starting hole B, or vice versa.

In addition, for time-saving game states that go through a jackpot game (first time-saving game state, third time-saving game state), a normal probability change may be generated, and for states that do not go through a jackpot game (second time-saving game state, fourth time-saving game state), a normal probability change may not be generated.

(Normal symbol determination table)
Figure 33 (b) is a normal symbol determination table which is referenced when determining the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the normal symbol determination information obtained based on the passage of the gaming ball through the normal symbol gate 44.

As shown in FIG. 33(b), the normal symbol determination table associates the game state when the determination is made, the result of the win determination (win, miss), a random number value for winning symbol determination, the result of the normal symbol determination, stopping normal symbol data indicating this determination result, and a normal symbol designation command indicating the result of the normal symbol determination.

The normal symbol "0" is a losing normal symbol that does not result in an auxiliary game being executed.
The normal symbols "1" and "2" are winning normal symbols for executing an auxiliary game.

(Normal map fluctuation pattern determination table)
FIG. 33(c) is a normal symbol variation pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the variation pattern of normal symbols in the normal game state.

As shown in Figure 33, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment table associates the game state when the judgment is made, the result of the hit judgment, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number value, the fluctuation time that is the judgment result of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern judgment, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates this judgment result, and the stop time of the normal symbol is listed for reference.

The first feature of the normal game fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that the fluctuation time determined in the time-saving game state tends to be shorter (the average fluctuation time is shorter) than the fluctuation time determined in the normal game state. By doing this, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the start hole (first start hole B46 or second start hole 47) in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The second feature of the normal game fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 33 is that there are fewer types of variable time in the time-saving game state (one type) than there are types of variable time in the normal game state (three types). By doing this, it is possible to vary the time-saving performance depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the normal symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 33 is that the normal symbol stop time in the time-saving game state is shorter than the normal symbol stop time in the normal game state. By doing this, the normal symbol variation display and the number of times auxiliary games are executed per unit time in the time-saving game state can be increased compared to the normal game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Auxiliary Game Control Table)
FIG. 33(d) is an auxiliary game control table used to control the auxiliary game based on the type of winning normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 33(d), the auxiliary game control table associates the game state when the auxiliary game occurs, the stop map data, the number of operations of the entrance opening/closing member 48d, the opening time of the auxiliary game, the first operation time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d, the interval time between openings, the second opening time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d, the third opening time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d, and the ending time of the auxiliary game.

In the auxiliary game, the flow path switching member 48e operates so that the game ball flows down the right flow path 48c for 1.5 seconds starting 0.4 seconds after the first operation of the inlet opening/closing member 48d, and otherwise the flow path switching member 48e operates so that the game ball flows down the left flow path 48b.

Therefore, in the first time-saving game state, the game ball guided by the inlet opening/closing member 48d and flowing into the conversion mechanism 48 basically does not flow into the left flow path 48b but flows into the right flow path 48c and presses the second starting port operating piece 48g, which opens the second variable starting section 47A and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47 (special time-saving state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting port than the first starting port).

On the other hand, in the second to fourth time-saving game states, the game ball guided by the inlet opening/closing member 48d and flowing into the conversion mechanism 48 basically does not flow into the right flow path 48c but flows into the left flow path 48b and presses the first starting port operating piece 48f, which opens the first variable starting section 46A and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the first starting port B46 (special time-saving state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the first starting port than the second starting port).

The first feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d) is that the number of times the entrance opening/closing member 48d operates is greater when an auxiliary game is executed in the time-saving game state than when an auxiliary game is executed in the normal game state. This makes it easier for a game ball to enter the start hole (first start hole B46 or second start hole 47) in the time-saving game state than in the normal game state, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

The second feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d) is that the number of operations of the entrance opening and closing member 48d is greater when an auxiliary game is executed in the second to fourth time-saving game states than when an auxiliary game is executed in the first time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to vary the time-saving performance depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d) is that the operation time of the entrance opening/closing member 48d is longer when an auxiliary game is executed in the second to fourth time-saving game states than when an auxiliary game is executed in the first time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to vary the time-saving performance depending on the type of time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d) is that the ending time is shorter when an auxiliary game is executed in the time-saving game state than when an auxiliary game is executed in the normal game state. The number of times that the normal symbol variations are displayed and the auxiliary game is executed per unit time in the time-saving game state can be increased compared to the normal game state, making the game more interesting.

The fifth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d) is that in the first time-saving game state (special time-saving), it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start hole 47 than the first start hole A45 or the first start hole B46. By doing this, it is possible to create a state in which the variable display of the second special pattern, which is more advantageous to the player, is more likely to be executed than the variable display of the first special pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the auxiliary game control table shown in FIG. 33(d) is that in the second to fourth time-saving game states (special 1 time-saving), it is easier for a game ball to enter the first start hole B46 than the first start hole A45 or the second start hole 47. By doing this, the second to fourth time-saving game states can be made to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, but less advantageous to the player than the first time-saving game state, making it possible to improve playability and increase interest in the game.

(Operation state of the variable starter unit in various time-saving game states)
Using Figure 34, the operating state of the variable starting unit in various game states will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 34(a), in the normal game mode or the time-saving game mode, if an auxiliary game is not executed as a result of a hit determination of a normal pattern based on the game ball passing through the normal pattern gate 44, the entrance opening/closing member 48d remains in the closed state (exiting state), so that the game ball that passed through the normal pattern gate 44 and subsequent game balls flow downstream without being guided into the inside of the conversion mechanism unit 48 by the entrance opening/closing member 48d.

As shown in FIG. 34(b), in the normal game mode or the time-saving game mode, when an auxiliary game is executed as a result of a hit determination of a normal pattern based on a game ball passing through the normal pattern gate 44, the entrance opening/closing member 48d is converted to an open state (protruding state), and among the game balls that have passed through the normal pattern gate 44 and subsequent game balls, the game balls guided by the entrance opening/closing member 48d are guided into the inside of the conversion mechanism unit 48 and flow down the upper flow path 48a.

As shown in FIG. 34(c), in the first time-saving game state (special time-saving 2), when game ball A that has flowed into the inside of the conversion mechanism 48 reaches the branching section, the flow path switching member 48e blocks the left flow path 48b and guides the game ball to the right flow path 48c, and the game ball A that is distributed to the right flow path 48c presses the second start port operating piece 48g, converting the second start port opening/closing member 47b to an open state, and the following game ball B enters the second start port 47. In addition, the weight of the game ball B that has entered the second start port 47 converts the second start port opening/closing member 47b to a closed state, and no more game balls can enter the second start port 47.

As shown in FIG. 34(d), in the second to fourth time-saving game states (special time saving 1), when game ball A that has flowed into the conversion mechanism 48 reaches the branching section, the flow path switching member 48e blocks the right flow path 48c and guides the game ball to the left flow path 48b, and the game ball A that is distributed to the left flow path 48b presses the first start port operating piece 48f, converting the first start port opening/closing member 46b to an open state, and the following game ball B enters the first start port B46. In addition, the weight of the game ball B that has entered the first start port B46 converts the first start port opening/closing member 46b to a closed state, and no more game balls can enter the first start port B46.

In this way, when an auxiliary game is executed in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving), the game ball guided into the inside of the conversion mechanism unit 48 by the entrance opening/closing member 48d in the protruding state (open state) presses the second start port operating piece 48g, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start port 47. Therefore, it is possible to make the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start port 47 than the first start port A45 or the first start port B46, that is, a time-saving state (special 2 time-saving) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the start port than in the normal game state and in which the variable display of the second special pattern is more likely to be executed than the variable display of the first special pattern.

In addition, when an auxiliary game is executed in the second to fourth time-saving game states (special 1 time-saving), the game ball guided into the inside of the conversion mechanism 48 by the entrance opening/closing member 48d in the protruding state (open state) presses the first start port operating piece 48f, making it easier for the game ball to enter the first start port B46. Therefore, it is possible to make the second to fourth time-saving game states (special 1 time-saving) into a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the first start port B46 than the first start port A45 or the second start port 47, that is, a time-saving state (special 1 time-saving) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the start port than in the normal game state and in which the first special symbol variation display is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol variation display.

(Game flow when a jackpot game is executed in normal game mode)
FIG. 35 shows a game flow when a big win game is executed in the normal game state.

As shown in the route in (a), when the first jackpot game, which started when the performance symbols 70a other than "7" were lined up in the jackpot variation performance, ends, the game moves to the first time-saving game state (special time-saving 2: J1 = 9 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time). Then, in this first time-saving game state, if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a stop in the special symbol variation display, which is the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game moves to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the special miss special symbol is displayed as a stop in the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game moves to the normal game state at the start of the stop time (stop display) of the special miss special symbol, but moves to the fourth time-saving game state (special time-saving 1: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1, Z = 1) at the end of the stop time.

As shown in the route in (b), when the second jackpot game, which started when the jackpot variable effect showed all the effect symbols 70a except for "7" lined up, ends, the game moves to the third time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 times, J2 = 5 times, Z = 1 time). Then, in this third time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and when the variable display of the special symbols, which is the final time in the third time-saving game state, shows a stopped display of the normal miss special symbol, the game moves to the normal game state without moving to the fourth time-saving game state.

As shown in the route in (c), when the third jackpot game, which started when the jackpot variable effect showed all the effect symbols 70a except for "7" lined up, ends, the game moves to the third time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 100 times, J2 = 5 times, Z = 1 time). Then, in this third time-saving game state, when the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a stop in the variable display of the special symbols, which is the final time in the third time-saving game state, the game moves to the normal game state without moving to the fourth time-saving game state.

As shown in the route in (d), when the fourth jackpot game, which started when the "7" effect pattern 70a was lined up in the jackpot variation effect, ends, the game moves to the first time-saving game state (special time-saving 2: J1 = 100 times, J2 = 100 times, Z = 2 times). Then, in this first time-saving game state, if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special pattern is displayed as a stop in the special pattern variation display that is the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game moves to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the special miss special pattern is displayed as a stop in the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game moves to the normal game state at the start of the stop time (stop display) of the special miss special pattern, but moves to the fourth time-saving game state (special time-saving 1: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stop time.

As shown in the route in (e), when the consecutive number of times the special symbol has been displayed as a missing symbol reaches a specified number (600 times), and the condition for transitioning to the time-saving game state is met, the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 850 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time). Then, in this second time-saving game state, when the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal missing special symbol is displayed as a stopped special symbol in the final time of the special symbol display in the second time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state without transitioning to the fourth time-saving game state.

As shown in the route in (f), if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" in the fourth time-saving game state transitioned from the first time-saving game state, and the special miss special symbol is displayed as a stopped special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final time in the fourth time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state at the start of the stopped time (stopped display) of the special miss special symbol, but transitions again to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stopped time. On the other hand, if the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a stopped special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final time in the fourth time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state without transitioning to the fourth time-saving game state.

(Game flow when a jackpot game is executed in the time-saving game state)
FIG. 36 shows a game flow when a big win game is executed in the time-saving game state.

Note that if the first, second, or third jackpot games are played during the time-saving game mode, the game progresses in essentially the same way as if the first, second, or third jackpot games were played during the normal game mode, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

As shown in the route in (a), in the time-saving game state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "1" or "2", when the fourth jackpot game, which started when the "7" presentation pattern 70a is lined up in the jackpot variable presentation, ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving: J1 = 100 times, J2 = 100 times, Z = 2 times). Then, in this first time-saving game state, if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special pattern is displayed in the variable display of the special pattern, which is the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game transitions to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the special miss symbol is displayed in the final round of the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the stop time (stop display) of the special miss symbol, but will transition to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stop time.

As shown in the route in (b), in a time-saving game state in which the remaining number of small wins Z is "2" (first time-saving game state after the end of a big win game caused by the arrangement of the "7" arrangement symbols 70a), when a small win variation effect is executed in which the first small win game is executed, the remaining number of small wins Z is subtracted to "1", but since it is not "0", the time-saving game state is maintained. Then, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 (no V entry) during the first small win game that was started during the time-saving game state by the arrangement of the arrangement symbols 70a other than "7" in the small win variation effect, the remaining number of times of the special 1 time-saving number J1 and the special 2 time-saving number J2 is inherited, and the remaining number of small wins Z becomes "1", and the state transitions to the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving). On the other hand, if the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the first small win game that is started during the time-saving game state (V win), the first V big win game is executed after the first small win game ends, and after the first V big win game ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving: J1 = 100 times, J2 = 100 times, Z = 1 time).

Then, in this first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving), if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the special miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the static display of the special miss special symbol, but will transition to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stopped time.

As shown in the route in (c), in a time-saving game state in which the remaining number of small wins Z is "2" (first time-saving game state after the end of a big win game caused by the arrangement of the "7" arrangement symbols 70a), when a small win variation effect in which a second small win game is to be executed is started, the remaining number of small wins Z is subtracted to "1", but since it is not "0", the time-saving game state is maintained. Then, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 (no V entry) during the second small win game that was started during the time-saving game state by the arrangement of the arrangement symbols 70a other than "7" in the small win variation effect, the remaining number of times of the special 1 time-saving number J1 and the special 2 time-saving number J2 is inherited, and the remaining number of small wins Z becomes "1", and the state transitions to the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving). On the other hand, if the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the second small win game that is started during the time-saving game state (V win), the second V big win game is executed after the second small win game ends, and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving: J1 = 100 times, J2 = 100 times, Z = 1 time) after the second V big win game ends.

Then, in this first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving), if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the special miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the static display of the special miss special symbol, but will transition to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stopped time.

As shown in the route in (d), in a time-saving game state in which the remaining number of small wins Z is "2" (first time-saving game state after the end of a big win game caused by the arrangement of the "7" arrangement symbols 70a), when a small win variation effect is executed in which a third small win game is to be executed, the remaining number of small wins Z is subtracted to "1", but since it is not "0", the time-saving game state is maintained. Then, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 (no V entry) during the third small win game that was started during the time-saving game state by the arrangement of the arrangement symbols 70a other than "7" in the small win variation effect, the remaining number of times of the special 1 time-saving number J1 and the special 2 time-saving number J2 is inherited, and the remaining number of times of the small win remaining number Z becomes "1", and the state transitions to the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving). On the other hand, if the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the third small win game that is started during the time-saving game state (V win), the third V big win game is executed after the third small win game ends, and after the third V big win game ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving: J1 = 100 times, J2 = 100 times, Z = 1 time).

Then, in this first time-saving game state, if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the special miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the static display of the special miss special symbol, but will transition to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stopped time.

As shown in the route in (e), in a time-saving game state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "1" (basically, a time-saving game state after the end of a big win game caused by the alignment of the performance symbols 70a other than "7"), when a small win variation effect in which a first small win game is executed is executed, the remaining number of small wins Z is subtracted to "0", the time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to a normal game state. Then, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 (no V entry) during the first small win game that is started during the normal game state after the alignment of the performance symbols 70a of "7" in the small win variation effect, the normal game state is maintained even after the end of the first small win game. On the other hand, if the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the first small win game that is started during the normal game state (V win), the first V big win game is executed after the first small win game ends, and after the first V big win game ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving: J1 = 100 times, J2 = 100 times, Z = 2 times).

In this first time-saving game state, if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the special miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state at the start of the static display of the special miss special symbol, but transitions to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stopped time.

As shown in the route in (f), in a time-saving game state where the remaining number of small wins Z is "1" (basically a time-saving game state after the end of a big win game caused by the alignment of the performance symbols 70a other than "7"), when a small win variation effect in which a second small win game is executed is executed, the remaining number of small wins Z is subtracted to "0", the time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to a normal game state. Then, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 (no V entry) during the second small win game that is started during the normal game state after the alignment of the performance symbols 70a other than "7" in the small win variation effect, the normal game state is maintained even after the end of the second small win game. On the other hand, if the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the second small win game that is started during the normal game state (V win), the second V big win game is executed after the second small win game ends, and the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (special time-saving 2: J1 = 9, J2 = 1, Z = 1) after the second V big win game ends.

In this first time-saving game state, if the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state. On the other hand, if the special miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the final time in the first time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state at the start of the static display of the special miss special symbol, but transitions to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stopped time.

As shown in the route in (g), in a time-saving game state in which the remaining number of small wins Z is "1" (basically a time-saving game state after the end of a big win game caused by the alignment of the effect symbols 70a other than "7"), when a small win variation effect is executed in which a second small win game is executed, the remaining number of small wins Z is subtracted to "0", the time-saving game state ends, and the game transitions to a normal game state. Then, if the game ball does not enter the specific area 53 (no V entry) during a third small win game that is started during the normal game state after the alignment of the effect symbols 70a other than "7" in the small win variation effect, the normal game state is maintained even after the end of the third small win game. On the other hand, if the game ball enters the specific area 53 during the third small win game that is started during the normal game state (V win), the third V big win game is executed after the third small win game ends, and after the third V big win game ends, the game transitions to the first time-saving game state (special time-saving 2: J1 = 9, J2 = 1, Z = 1).

Then, when the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" and the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a static display of the special symbol in the final time of the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state. On the other hand, when the special miss special symbol is displayed as a static display in the final time of the first time-saving game state, the game will transition to the normal game state at the start of the static display of the special miss special symbol, but will transition to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stopped time.

As shown in the route in (h), when the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0" in the fourth time-saving game state entered from the first time-saving game state without going through a jackpot game, and the special miss special symbol is displayed as a stopped special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final time in the fourth time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state at the start of the stop time (stop display) of the special miss special symbol, but transitions again to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving: J1 = 50 or 100 times, J2 = 1 time, Z = 1 time) at the end of the stop time. On the other hand, when the normal miss special symbol is displayed as a stopped special symbol in the variable display of the special symbol that is the final time in the fourth time-saving game state, the game state transitions to the normal game state without transitioning to the fourth time-saving game state.

In this way, according to the game flow shown in Figures 35 and 36, the time-saving game state includes special 1 time-saving (second to fourth time-saving game states) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the first start port than the second start port (the first start condition is more likely to be met than the second start condition), and special 2 time-saving (first time-saving game state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start port than the first start port (the second start condition is more likely to be met than the first start condition), and can be controlled to special 1 time-saving after the end of the first jackpot game (second jackpot game, third jackpot game), and can be controlled to special 2 time-saving after the end of the second jackpot game (first jackpot game, fourth jackpot game). This makes it possible to improve playability and increase interest in the game.

In addition, according to the game flow shown in Figures 35 and 36, the jackpot game includes the first special game (first to third jackpot games) and the second special game (fourth jackpot game, first V to third V jackpot game), and when the first special game is executed, it is possible to control to special 1 time reduction, and when the second special game is executed, it is possible to control to special 2 time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the types of jackpot games and increase the excitement of the game.

According to the game flow shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the time-saving game state includes a special 1 time-saving state (second to fourth time-saving game states) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the first start port than the second start port (the first start condition is more likely to be established than the second start condition), and a special 2 time-saving state (first time-saving game state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start port than the first start port (the second start condition is more likely to be established than the first start condition), and the special 2 time-saving state can be controlled to the special 2 time-saving state for a predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game (first jackpot game, fourth jackpot game), and can be controlled to the special 1 time-saving state after the end of the special 2 time-saving state without executing a jackpot game or a variable display of a special pattern. Therefore, the type of time-saving game state can be changed according to the progress of the game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the game flow shown in Figures 35 and 36, if the special 2 time reduction ends when the first special symbol change display (normal miss change display) is executed, it is not controlled to special 1 time reduction, but if the second time reduction ends when the second special symbol change display (special miss change display) is executed, it is possible to control to special 1 time reduction. Therefore, the subsequent game state can be made different depending on the type of special symbol change display that ended the special 2 time reduction, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the game flow shown in Figures 35 and 36, it is possible to control to special 1 time reduction without executing a jackpot game or a variable display of a special symbol after the end of special 2 time reduction, but it is not possible to control to special 2 time reduction without executing a jackpot game or a variable display of a special symbol after the end of special 1 time reduction. Therefore, it is possible to increase the joy of the player when it is controlled to special 2 time reduction instead of special 1 time reduction, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

According to the game flow shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the time-saving game state includes a special 1 time-saving state (second to fourth time-saving game states) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the first start port than the second start port (the first start condition is more likely to be met than the second start condition), and a special 2 time-saving state (first time-saving game state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second start port than the first start port (the second start condition is more likely to be met than the first start condition), and when a miss variable display (a number of times determined to be a miss) of a special pattern is executed a predetermined number of times after a predetermined condition is met, it is possible to control to the special 1 time-saving state without going through a jackpot game. Therefore, when a miss variable display occurs consecutively, the player can be rescued, and the interest of the game can be improved.

According to the game flow shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the conditions for terminating the time-saving game state include a first condition that is established when a predetermined game (variable display of special symbols) is played a first number of times (e.g., once), a second condition that is established when a predetermined game (variable display of special symbols) is played a second number of times (e.g., 100 times) that is greater than the first number of times, a third condition that is established when a small win game is played a third number of times (e.g., once), and a fourth condition that is established when a small win game is played a fourth number of times (e.g., twice) that is greater than the third number of times. If the game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small win game that is executed after a specific performance pattern (a combination of performance patterns other than "7") is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled to a time-saving game state that ends when either the first or third end condition is met after the big win game ends, and if the game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small win game that is executed after a specific performance pattern (a combination of performance patterns of "7") is stopped and displayed, the game is controlled to a time-saving game state that ends when either the second or fourth end condition is met after the big win game ends. Therefore, when a big win game is executed due to a specific performance pattern (a combination of performance patterns of "7"), it is possible to create a game state in which multiple big win games are likely to be executed thereafter, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

According to the game flow shown in FIG. 35 and FIG. 36, the end conditions of the time-saving game state include a first end condition that is established by a predetermined game (variable display of special symbols) being played a first number of times (e.g., once), and a second end condition that is established by a predetermined game (variable display of special symbols) being played a second number of times (e.g., 100 times) that is greater than the first number of times. If the game ball enters the specific area 53 during a small win game and the game is in a normal game state, the game state is controlled to end when the first end condition is established, and if the game ball enters the specific area during a small win game and the game is in a time-saving game state, the game state is controlled to end when the second end condition is established. Therefore, even if the same special symbol is stopped and displayed, the game state after the big win can be made different, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the production control section)
The main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 37. Fig. 37 is a flowchart of the main processing in the performance control unit 130m.

First, the sub-CPU 130a disables all interrupts in step E1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting internal registers in step E2, and allows access to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E3.

In step E4, the sub-CPU 130a initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas (work area, stack area, unused area) of the sub-RAM 130c, in step E5 it starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step E6 it enables all interrupts.

In step E7, the sub-CPU 130a performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update the various random numbers stored in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E7 is repeated.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interruption process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 38. Fig. 38 is a flowchart of the timer interruption process in the performance control unit 130m. This timer interruption process is executed by inputting a clock pulse every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) from a reset clock pulse generating circuit provided in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers to the stack area of the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E200, performs timer update processing. Specifically, it performs processing to update various timer counters required for the execution of the performance.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to analyze the commands (sent from the main control board 110 or the payout control unit 121) stored in the receive buffer in the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c. Details of the command analysis processing will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting control processing in step E400. Specifically, in a customer waiting state where no special symbol variation display or special games (big win game, small win game) are being executed, the sub-CPU 130a judges whether or not the customer waiting time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, and performs processing to execute a customer waiting demo performance to stimulate the player's desire to play based on the elapse of the customer waiting time.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing the operation-based presentation. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a executes a promotion presentation that prompts the player to operate the presentation button 17 during a valid period that occurs during the variable presentation, and executes a jackpot advance presentation of the operation-based presentation that suggests the likelihood of a jackpot game being played (provides the player with the expectation that a jackpot game will be played) in response to the operation of the presentation button 17 during this valid period.

There are four types of "operation-related jackpot prediction effects": line prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played based on the type of line or display mode displayed on the image display device; roulette prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played based on the result of a roulette played on the image display device; cut-in prediction effects that suggest the likelihood of a jackpot game being played based on the type of cut-in image or display mode displayed on the image display device; and winning/losing determination effects that suggest whether or not a special game will be played based on a success effect where the likelihood of a jackpot game being played is 100% or a failure effect where the likelihood of a jackpot game being played is 0%.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing a lamp light-emitting effect. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for executing a lamp light-emitting effect that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot game being played by changing the light-emitting state of the start-gate lamp 75 in response to changes in the hold icon displayed on the image display device and the display state of the icon.

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, it determines whether or not an update condition (change in game state, winning a mode update lottery, execution of a SP/SPSP reach presentation that results in a loss, etc.) for the presentation mode (presentation stage) that specifies the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, etc.) in the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc., has been met, and if the update condition has been met, it performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of the multiple presentation modes.

The "presentation modes" include normal presentation modes A to D, which are set in the normal game state (non-time-saving game state), challenge mode, rush mode, legend mode A, and legend mode B, which are set in the first time-saving game state, and home mode, which is set in the second and third time-saving game states.

The "normal presentation modes A to D" are presentation modes in which the normal special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 19 (a) is selected.
The "challenge mode" and "rush mode" are presentation modes in which the special chart change pattern determination table 1 for the first time reduction (special 2 time reduction) shown in Figure 19 (b) is selected.
"Legend mode A" and "Legend mode B" are presentation modes in which the special chart change pattern determination table 2 for the first time reduction (special 2 time reduction) shown in Figure 19 (c) is selected.
The "homecoming mode" is a presentation mode in which a special chart change pattern determination table for the second and third time reductions (special 1 time reduction) shown in Figure 19(a) or a special chart change pattern determination table for the fourth time reduction (special 1 time reduction) shown in Figure 19(b) is selected.

In step E750, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing for the second time-saving effect. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing such as judging whether or not to execute a second time-saving effect (such as an RWM clear negation effect that indicates that the RWM has not been cleared (is stationary) when the power is turned on, or an activation counter display that indicates the number of times the game will change before the game transitions to the second time-saving game state) to indicate information related to the occurrence of the second time-saving game state.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to transmit various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the general control unit 141 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a restores the registers that were saved to the RWM area of the sub-RAM 130c in step E100 described above, and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Mode flow showing the transition of the performance mode)
Figure 39(a) is a mode flow showing the progression of presentation modes starting from normal presentation mode, Figure 39(b) is a mode flow showing the progression of presentation modes starting from home mode, Figure 40(a) is a mode flow showing the progression of presentation modes starting from challenge mode, rush mode, or legend mode B, and Figure 40(b) is a mode flow showing the progression of presentation modes starting from legend mode A.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the normal presentation mode is used as the starting point, the challenge mode is set in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) which is entered after the end of the first jackpot game, which is executed after the arrangement of presentation symbols 70a other than "7" is completed, and the return home mode is set in the third time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) which is entered after the end of the second jackpot game and the third jackpot game, which are executed after the arrangement of presentation symbols 70a other than "7" is completed.

In addition, Legend Mode A is set in the fourth jackpot game that is executed after the performance pattern 70a of "7" is lined up as a result of a specific winning special pattern (stop special pattern data "11", "13") among multiple winning special patterns being stopped and displayed, and in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to which the game is transitioned after the end of the first V jackpot game and the fourth V jackpot game that is executed after the performance pattern 70a other than "7" is lined up, and in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to which the game is transitioned after the end of the third V jackpot game.

In addition, the homecoming mode is set in the fourth time-saving game state, which is entered after the special miss special symbol is displayed stationary, and in the second time-saving game state, which is entered after the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a miss variable state reaches a specified number.

When a specific jackpot special symbol (stop special symbol data "11", "13") is displayed as a result of the change in the second special symbol based on the last reserved memory of the remaining reserved second special symbol (second reservation) when transitioning from the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to the normal game state, there is a possibility that the winning change display of the first special symbol will be executed in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to which the transition is made after the jackpot ends. In this case, a situation will arise in which it is not possible to guarantee two jackpot games, so the fourth jackpot game or the first V jackpot game is executed by lining up performance symbols 70a other than "7", and then the rush mode (which may be legendary mode B) is set in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to which the transition is made thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 39(b), when the homecoming mode (special 1 time reduction) is used as the starting point, the challenge mode is set in the first time reduction game state (special 2 time reduction) which is entered after the end of the first jackpot game, which is executed after the performance pattern 70a other than "7" is lined up, and the homecoming mode is set in the third time reduction game state (special 1 time reduction) which is entered after the end of the second jackpot game and the third jackpot game, which are executed after the performance pattern 70a other than "7" is lined up.

In addition, Legend Mode A is set in the fourth jackpot game that is executed after the performance pattern 70a of "7" is lined up as a result of a specific winning special pattern (stop special pattern data "11", "13") among multiple winning special patterns being stopped and displayed, and in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to which the game is transitioned after the end of the first V jackpot game and the fourth V jackpot game that is executed after the performance pattern 70a other than "7" is lined up, and in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to which the game is transitioned after the end of the third V jackpot game.

Furthermore, normal presentation mode D is set in the normal game state that is entered after the number of time-saving times (J1, J2, or Z) becomes "0".

As shown in FIG. 40(a), when the challenge mode, rush mode, or legend mode B (special 2 time reduction) is used as the starting point, the challenge mode is set in the first time reduction game state (special 2 time reduction) which is entered after the end of the first jackpot game, which is executed after the performance pattern 70a other than "7" is lined up, and the homecoming mode is set in the third time reduction game state (special 1 time reduction) which is entered after the end of the second jackpot game and the third jackpot game, which are executed after the performance pattern 70a other than "7" is lined up.

In addition, Legend Mode A is set in the fourth jackpot game that is executed after the performance pattern 70a of "7" is lined up as a result of a specific winning special pattern (stop special pattern data "11", "13") among multiple winning special patterns being stopped and displayed, and in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to which the game is transitioned after the end of the first V jackpot game and the fourth V jackpot game that is executed after the performance pattern 70a other than "7" is lined up, and in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to which the game is transitioned after the end of the third V jackpot game.

In addition, the homecoming mode is set in the fourth time-saving game state, which is entered after the special miss special pattern is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 40(b), when the starting point is Legend Mode A (special 2 time reduction), the challenge mode is set in the first time reduction game state (special 2 time reduction) which is entered after the end of the first jackpot game, which is executed after the alignment of the performance symbols 70a other than "7", and the return home mode is set in the third time reduction game state (special 1 time reduction) which is entered after the end of the second jackpot game and the third jackpot game, which are executed after the alignment of the performance symbols 70a other than "7".

In addition, legend mode A is set in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) which is entered after the end of the fourth jackpot game, which is executed after the performance pattern 70a of "7" is lined up as a result of a specific winning special pattern (stop special pattern data "11", "13") being stopped and displayed among multiple winning special patterns, and legend mode B is set in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) which is entered after the end of the first V jackpot game, the second V jackpot game, and the third V jackpot game, which are executed after the performance pattern 70a other than "7" is lined up.

In this way, according to the mode flows shown in Figures 39 and 40, different presentation modes are set depending on whether the game is controlled to special 1 time-saving mode (third to fourth time-saving game state) or special 2 time-saving game state (first time-saving game state) after the end of a jackpot game. Therefore, depending on the type of presentation mode, it is possible to know whether the current time-saving game state is special 1 time-saving mode or special 2 time-saving mode, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In this way, according to the mode flows shown in Figures 39 and 40, the same presentation mode (homecoming mode) is set up for when the player is controlled to the special 1 time-saving mode (third to fourth time-saving game state) via a jackpot game and when the player is controlled to the special 1 time-saving mode (second time-saving game state) without a jackpot game. This makes it easier to understand that it is the same special 1 time-saving mode, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, according to the mode flow shown in Figures 39 and 40, in the variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the completion of the performance pattern "7" 70a associated with the stopping display of a specific special winning symbol (special stopping symbol data "11", "13") among the multiple special winning symbols, the game is controlled to the legend mode, which essentially guarantees that two jackpot games will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the performance pattern "7" 70a to be completed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

According to the mode flow shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, when a jackpot variation effect is executed in a time-saving play state in which an effect mode other than the legend mode (challenge mode, rush mode) is set, the rate at which the "7" effect pattern 70a is lined up (about 15% when the fourth jackpot game is executed and when the first V jackpot game is executed) differs from the rate at which the "7" effect pattern 70a is lined up when a jackpot variation effect is executed in a time-saving play state in which the legend mode A is set (about 2% only when the fourth jackpot game is executed). Therefore, the expectation of whether or not the "7" effect pattern 70a is lined up and the game transitions to the legend mode can be changed depending on the type of effect mode, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the mode flow shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, the rate at which the "7" presentation symbol 70a is lined up when the jackpot variation presentation is executed in the time-saving play state in which legend mode A is set (approximately 2% only when the fourth jackpot game is executed) is different from the rate at which the "7" presentation symbol 70a is lined up when the jackpot variation presentation is executed in the time-saving play state in which legend mode B is set (approximately 15% combined when the fourth jackpot game is executed and the first V jackpot game is executed). Therefore, the expectation of whether or not the "7" presentation symbol 70a is lined up and the game transitions to legend mode can be changed depending on the type of presentation mode, making the game more interesting.

According to the mode flow shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, in the time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) in which the presentation mode (challenge mode, rush mode, etc.) corresponding to the time-saving game state other than the legend mode A is set, when a specific variable presentation (fourth jackpot variable presentation) that enables a specific jackpot game (fourth jackpot game or first V jackpot game) is executed, it is possible to stop and display the result of the "7" presentation pattern 70a, and when the specific variable presentation executed based on the second reserved memory when the time-saving game state ends satisfies a predetermined condition (the final reservation of the remaining reserved memory of the second special pattern), the specific variable presentation (fourth jackpot variable presentation) is restricted from stopping and displaying the result of the "7" presentation pattern 70a (not displayed). Therefore, the ratio of the results of the "7" presentation pattern 70a being stopped and displayed can be varied depending on the state of the second reserved memory when the time-saving game state ends, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the mode flow shown in FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, when a variable effect that enables a specific jackpot game (4th jackpot game or 1st V jackpot game) is executed in the last reserved memory of the remaining reserved (2nd reserved) of the 2nd special pattern when the 1st time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) is switched to the normal game state, there is a possibility that the winning variable display of the 1st special pattern will be executed in the 1st time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) to which the game is switched after the jackpot ends, and in this case, a situation occurs in which it is not possible to guarantee two jackpot games, so the display of the numbers that match the "7" performance pattern 70a is restricted (the numbers that match performance patterns other than "7" are displayed). Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of switching to the normal game state without executing two jackpot games even though the numbers that match the "7" performance pattern 70a, which essentially guarantees two jackpot games, are displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Command analysis process of the production control unit)
The command analysis process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 41. Fig. 41 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E301, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a command has been received. If a command has been received, the process proceeds to step E302; if a command has not been received, the current command analysis process is terminated.

In step E302, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting change command. If it is a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E303. If it is not a setting change command, the process proceeds to step E304.

In step E303, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting change notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the setting change notification described above in a transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting change notification.

In step E304, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a setting confirmation command. If it is a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E305. If it is not a setting confirmation command, the process proceeds to step E306.

In step E305, the sub-CPU 130a performs a setting check notification process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification instruction command for starting the above-mentioned setting check notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the setting check notification.

In step E306, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a power-on command or a power restoration command. If it is a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E307. If it is not a power-on command or a power restoration command, the process proceeds to step E308.

In step E307, the sub-CPU 130a performs a power-on notification process. Specifically, if the received command is a power-on command, the sub-CPU 130a sets a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power-on notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the received command is a power restoration command, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a notification command for executing the above-mentioned power restoration notification in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the power-on notification or power restoration notification, and processing is performed to execute an initial operation for operating the movable performance device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) in a predetermined manner and an initial light emission for emitting light from the board lighting device 74 in a predetermined manner.

In step E308, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is an error-related command. If it is an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E309. If it is not an error-related command, the process proceeds to step E310.

"Error-related designation commands" include commands for designating unrecoverable errors, commands for designating improper winning errors, commands for designating abnormal winning errors, commands for designating magnetic errors, commands for designating radio wave errors, commands for designating the start of door opening errors, commands for designating the end of door opening errors, and commands for designating operational errors.

The sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E309. Specifically, it performs processing to set a notification instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c in order to execute an error notification (unrecoverable error notification, improper winning error notification, abnormal winning error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification, door open error notification, operation error notification, etc.) according to the type of error specification command received. As a result, the notification instruction command is sent to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute various types of error notifications.

In step E310, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a game state designation command. If it is a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E311. If it is not a game state designation command, the process proceeds to step E312.

In step E311, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game state setting process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to update the game state stored in the sub-RAM 130c to a game state corresponding to the game state designation command.

In step E312, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol storage command. If it is a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E313. If it is not a special symbol storage command, the process proceeds to step E314.

In step E313, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved number update process. Specifically, it performs a process of setting a performance instruction command to update the reserved number of special drawings stored in the sub-RAM 130c and increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the image display device in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to increase or decrease the reserved icons displayed on the image display device.

In step E314, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a look-ahead command. If it is, the sub-CPU 130a sets the received look-ahead command (special chart planned variation pattern) in a look-ahead memory area of the sub-RAM 130c (described later) and then proceeds to step E315. If it is not, the sub-CPU 130a proceeds to step E318.

The "look-ahead memory area" is divided into a first look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing look-ahead information (such as a planned special chart change pattern) based on a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead memory section for sequentially storing pending information based on a second look-ahead designation command, and a memory section (the 0th memory section) for storing look-ahead information corresponding to the change display (change performance) currently being executed, and the first look-ahead memory section and the second look-ahead memory section are each divided into the 1st to 4th memory sections.

The first to fourth memory sections of the first look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the first special symbol determination information reservation memory area described above, respectively, and when the first look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the first reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the first special symbol is executed.

The first to fourth memory sections of the second look-ahead memory section correspond to the first to fourth memory sections of the second special symbol determination information reservation memory area described above, respectively, and when a second look-ahead designation command is received, the look-ahead information is stored in the memory section corresponding to the second reservation number. The look-ahead information stored in each memory section is moved (shifted) to the memory section with the next lower number each time a variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol is executed.

This memory unit (the 0th memory unit) corresponds to the special pattern determination information execution memory area described above, and when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the first pre-reading memory unit is stored, and when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the pre-reading information moved (shifted) from the first memory unit of the second pre-reading unit is stored.

In step E315, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine whether or not to execute an icon change effect that suggests the expectation (possibility) of a special game being executed by displaying the pending icon or the icon displayed on the image display device in a special display mode (special icon, specific icon) that is different from the normal display mode (normal icon), and the effect mode of the icon change effect to be executed. Details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

In step E316, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining the light-emitting effect to be used when a winning ball enters the starting hole. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining whether or not to perform a light-emitting effect when a winning ball enters the starting hole, the light-emitting effect indicating the likelihood of a special game being played by illuminating the top lamp 10b located at the top center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 in a special light-emitting mode different from the normal light-emitting mode, and the mode of the light-emitting effect to be performed when a winning ball enters the starting hole.

In step E317, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of determining the look-ahead continuous performance. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead continuous performance that creates the expectation that a jackpot game will be played (indicates the possibility that a jackpot game will be played) by executing a predetermined performance over the variable display (variable performance) of one or more special symbols, and determines the type of look-ahead continuous performance to be executed, and performs a process of setting a performance instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance. The details of the look-ahead continuous performance determination process will be described later.

In step E318, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special symbol designation command. If it is a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E319. If it is not a special symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step E320.

In step E319, the sub-CPU 130a performs a pattern data determination process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to determine the effect patterns to be displayed on the image display device as a result of the variable effect, i.e., the arrangement (combination) of the effect patterns to be displayed on a predetermined pay line.

In step E320, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special chart variation pattern designation command. If it is a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E321. If it is not a special chart variation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step E325.

In step E321, the sub-CPU 130a performs a variable performance pattern determination process. Specifically, based on the contents of the received special chart variable pattern designation command, the variable performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the variable performance executed by the performance device including the image display device, is determined, and a performance instruction command indicating the variable performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance. The variable performance pattern determination process will be described in detail later.

In step E322, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process for determining a jackpot advance notice effect. Specifically, based on the variable effect pattern determined in step E321, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not to execute a jackpot advance notice effect that suggests the likelihood of a special game being played (to generate anticipation that a jackpot game will be played), determines the presentation mode (pattern) of the jackpot advance notice effect to be executed, and sets execution information for the jackpot advance notice effect in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E323, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process to start the icon change effect determined in the icon change effect determination process in step E315, and to change the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed.

In step E324, the sub-CPU 130a performs a look-ahead continuous performance execution process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of setting a performance instruction command for starting the look-ahead continuous performance determined in the look-ahead continuous performance determination process in step E317 or for changing the performance mode in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead continuous performance.

In step E325, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a pattern determination command. If it is a pattern determination command, the process proceeds to step E326. If it is not a pattern determination command, the process proceeds to step E327.

In step E326, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of stopping the effect symbols. Specifically, the process performs a process of setting an effect instruction command in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to stop the display of the effect symbols that are in a temporarily stopped state and end the variable effect. As a result, the effect instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a process of ending the variable effect is performed.

In step E327, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the received command is a special game command. If it is a special game command, the process proceeds to step E328. If it is not a special game command, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current command analysis process.

"Special game designation commands" include a big win opening designation command, a big win round designation command, a big win ending designation command, a small win opening designation command, a small win ending designation command, etc.

In step E328, the sub-CPU 130a performs a special game performance determination process. Specifically, in the case of an opening designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining an opening performance for a big win game or a small win game and executing the opening performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of a round designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining a round performance for a round game and executing the round performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. In the case of an ending designation command, a process is performed in which a performance instruction command for determining an ending performance for a big win game or a small win game and executing the ending performance is set in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current command analysis process is terminated. As a result, the performance instruction command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the opening performance, round performance, or ending performance.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 42. Fig. 42 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E315-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead command received from the main control board 110, and in step E315-2, determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E315-3. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E315-7, assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead command will not be performed.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be performed" refers to a period during which a jackpot game is not being played, a normal game state or a second to fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) is played when a look-ahead command based on a win at the first start port A45 or the first start port B46 is received, and a first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) is played when a look-ahead command based on a win at the second start port 47 is received, etc.

In step E315-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a change scenario in the advance pending (pending memory corresponding to the previously received look-ahead specification command), that is, whether or not a change scenario has been set in the look-ahead information storage area. If there is a change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-7 assuming that the icon change performance based on the currently received look-ahead specification command will not be executed, and if there is no change scenario, the process proceeds to step E315-4.

In step E315-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E315-5, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 43) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E315-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the final icon display mode determination table shown in FIG. 43, and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the type of special symbol specified by the look-ahead command, the expected change pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E315-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E315-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a special icon (either a blue icon, a red icon, or a rainbow icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a special icon that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E315-12.

In step E315-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 44) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E315-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending memory number counter. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 44 is referenced, and one change scenario is determined from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the pending memory number of special patterns corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E315-11, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the display mode of the icon that is first displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process.

As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD), and a predetermined sound effect (a first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, and a second winning sound when displayed as a special icon or a specific icon) is output.

In step E315-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending memory number counter.

In step E315-13, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change presentation decision process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a reserved icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

In the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, an icon change effect (pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when there is no change scenario in the advance hold, but an icon change effect may be executed when the advance hold does not perform a reach effect, and an icon change effect may not be executed when the advance hold performs a reach effect. In this way, no change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is executed, and a change in the display mode of the pending icon occurs during the change effect corresponding to the advance hold in which a reach effect is not executed, so that the icon change effect will not hinder the reach effect, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, even if the advance holds include one that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed, but the icon change effect may be executed more easily (executed at a higher rate) when the advance holds do not include one that performs a reach effect than when the advance holds include one that performs a reach effect.

In addition, when a look-ahead command for the first special symbol is received in the second to fourth time-saving play states, an icon change effect can be executed. However, it is also possible to have the icon change effect not be executed even when a look-ahead command for the first special symbol is received, and to execute the icon change effect only when a look-ahead command for the second special symbol is received.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table which is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the type of special pattern and expected change pattern specified by the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode.

The final icon display modes include normal icons (white icons) that do not indicate the likelihood of an outcome favorable to the player (jackpot, small win, special miss), and special icons (blue icons, red icons, rainbow icons) that indicate the likelihood of an outcome favorable to the player (jackpot, small win, special miss). The likelihood of an outcome favorable to the player (particularly a jackpot or small win) associated with the special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon (guaranteed jackpot or small win).

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that the icon change effect is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) when the variable display result of the second special symbol is a special miss than when the variable display result of the first special symbol is a normal miss. By doing this, even though the stopped display of the special miss special symbol in the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) where the variable display of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed is invalid and there is often no transition to the fourth time-saving game state, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player becoming fed up with the frequent icon change effect, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 43 is that in the case of a look-ahead designation command for the first special symbol, the icon final display mode is determined by referring to the jackpot determination result and the expected change pattern, whereas in the case of a look-ahead designation command for the second special symbol, the icon final display mode is determined by referring to the jackpot determination result without referring to the expected change pattern. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the normal game state, where the duration of play tends to be long, and to increase the interest of the game.

(Change Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 44 shows a variation scenario determination table which is referred to when determining a variation scenario.

The change scenario determination table associates the final display mode of the icon, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected, and for reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

The change scenarios include scenarios (e.g., scenario 01, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon does not change while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is not executed) but changes while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is executed), scenarios (e.g., scenario 04, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is executed) but does not change while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is not executed), and scenarios (e.g., scenario 15, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed and while the change is being performed (the pending icon change performance and the relevant icon change performance are executed).

(Preview read-ahead continuous performance decision processing of the performance control unit)
The look-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead continuous performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E317-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E530-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the process for determining the look-ahead continuous performance is terminated.

In step E317-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead command, whether or not it is a jackpot, the content of the performance (expected change pattern), etc.

In step E317-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is one in which a look-ahead reach performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which a look-ahead reach performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-4. If the current period is not one in which a look-ahead reach performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-6, assuming that the look-ahead reach performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "pre-reading reach effect" is a type of pre-reading reach effect in which a series of effects from the pre-reach effect (pre-reach change such as normal change) to the during-reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, etc.) in a reach change effect are distributed (divided) across multiple change effects, making it look as if a single change effect is being executed. This makes it possible to shorten the performance time for each change effect, improving the execution efficiency of the change effects while also increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

The "period during which a look-ahead reach effect can be executed" includes being in a normal game state or in the second to fourth time-saving game states, not being in or scheduled to be in a look-ahead reach effect, not being in or scheduled to be in a look-ahead countdown effect (described below), not being in a jackpot game, etc. Therefore, while a look-ahead reach effect can be executed in overlap with a look-ahead zone effect (described below), a look-ahead reach effect will not be executed in overlap with a look-ahead countdown effect (described below).

In step E317-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead reach performance scenario determination table (see Figures 46 and 47) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead reach performance. Details of the look-ahead reach performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the look-ahead reach performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead reach performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 46 or FIG. 47, and determines the look-ahead reach performance scenario based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of planned fluctuation pattern, the performance content of the advance fluctuation (whether it is a jackpot or not, the type of fluctuation time), and the selection rate (%) of each scenario.

In step E317-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the non-execution scenario of the pre-reading reach performance (scenario 00) as the performance scenario in which the pre-reading reach performance is not executed.

In step E317-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead reach performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead reach performance scenario is referenced in the variable performance pattern determination process in step E321 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead reach performance.

In step E317-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-9. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead zone performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-11, assuming that the look-ahead zone performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "look-ahead zone effect" is an effect that continuously suggests the expectation of a special game being executed by using background images, text information, and color information (expectation value information) by performing in-zone effects (displaying a look-ahead zone background image, displaying a blue zone image or a red heat zone image, and outputting zone BGM or heat zone BGM) across one or more variable effects, and is a type of look-ahead continuous effect.

The "period during which the look-ahead zone effect can be executed" includes the period during which the game is in normal play, when the look-ahead zone effect is not being executed or scheduled to be executed, when the game is not in a jackpot, etc. Therefore, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed in overlap with the look-ahead reach effect and the look-ahead countdown effect described below.

In step E317-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 48) for determining the scenario of the look-ahead zone performance. Details of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines the look-ahead zone performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48, and determines one look-ahead zone performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead zone performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of expected fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario.

In step E317-11, the sub-CPU 130a determines the non-execution scenario for the look-ahead zone presentation (scenario 00) as the presentation scenario in which the look-ahead zone presentation is not executed.

In step E317-12, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead zone performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead zone performance scenario is referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead zone performance.

In step E317-13, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-14. If the current period is not one in which the look-ahead countdown performance can be executed, the process proceeds to step E317-16, assuming that the look-ahead countdown performance based on the currently received look-ahead designation command will not be executed.

The "pre-reading countdown effect" is an effect that uses text and sound information to intermittently indicate the time (variable effect) when a special game may be played and the likelihood of the special game being played by performing a countdown effect (displaying a counting image and outputting a counting sound) over one or more variable effects, and is a type of pre-reading continuous effect.

"Period during which a look-ahead countdown effect can be executed" refers to a time-saving game state, a time when a look-ahead countdown effect is not being executed or scheduled to be executed, a time when a look-ahead reach effect is not being executed or scheduled to be executed, a time when a jackpot game is not being executed, etc. Therefore, while a look-ahead countdown effect can be executed in overlap with a look-ahead zone effect, a look-ahead countdown effect will not be executed in overlap with a look-ahead reach effect.

In step E317-14, the sub-CPU 130a selects a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table (see FIG. 49) for determining the scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance. Details of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E317-15, the sub-CPU 130a determines a look-ahead countdown performance scenario. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 49, and determines one look-ahead countdown performance scenario from among multiple look-ahead countdown performance scenarios based on the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, the type of expected variation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each performance scenario.

In step E317-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines the non-execution scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance (scenario 00) as the performance scenario in which the look-ahead countdown performance is not executed.

In step E317-17, the sub-CPU 130a sets the determined look-ahead countdown performance scenario in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, which corresponds to the reserved number counter. As a result, the look-ahead countdown performance scenario is referenced in the look-ahead continuous performance execution process of step E324 described above, and processing is performed to execute the look-ahead countdown performance. When this process ends, the current look-ahead continuous performance determination process ends.

In this way, the type of predictive continuous performance that is executed varies depending on the type of game state. This allows differentiation between each game state, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, during the execution of a look-ahead reach effect, where it is desired to make the boundary (boundary) of the variable effects ambiguous (not to be understood), the execution of a look-ahead countdown effect, which is executed intermittently and tends to make the boundary (boundary) of the variable effects clear, is restricted (not executed). This allows the effect of the look-ahead reach effect to be fully realized, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the execution of a look-ahead reach effect, where it is desired to make the boundary (boundary) of the variable effect ambiguous (not to be understood), it is possible to execute a look-ahead zone effect, which is executed continuously and thus makes the boundary (boundary) of the variable effect less clear. Therefore, by combining the look-ahead reach effect and the look-ahead zone effect, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during the execution of a look-ahead reach effect, in which it is desired to make the boundary (boundary) of the change effect unclear (not to be understood), it is possible to execute an icon change effect (a pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) that is executed continuously. Therefore, by combining the look-ahead reach effect and the icon change effect, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect and increase the interest of the game.

It may also be possible to execute a look-ahead countdown performance while a look-ahead reach performance is being executed. In that case, the execution rate of the look-ahead countdown performance may be lower than when a look-ahead reach performance is not being executed, and the performance effect may be lower than that of a normal look-ahead countdown performance (for example, the size of the count image or the volume of the count sound may be smaller, etc.).

In addition, the execution of the icon change effect may be restricted while the look-ahead reach effect is being executed. For example, the execution of the pending icon change effect may be restricted, but the execution of the icon change effect related to the variable effect that triggered the execution of the look-ahead reach effect may be allowed, or the execution rate of the icon change effect may be lowered compared to when the look-ahead reach effect is not being executed.

(Prediction Reach Performance Scenario Decision Table)
Figure 46 is a diagram showing a look-ahead reach presentation scenario decision table for a miss that is referenced when determining a scenario for a look-ahead reach presentation when the look-ahead designation command indicates a miss, and Figure 47 is a look-ahead reach presentation scenario decision table for a jackpot that is referenced when the look-ahead designation command indicates a jackpot.

The look-ahead reach performance scenario decision table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the performance content of the advance change (whether it is a miss change or not, whether it is a specific change time or not), the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario of each look-ahead reach performance, and the performance scenario of the look-ahead reach performance that will be selected. Details of the performance scenarios of the look-ahead reach performance will be described later.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart judgment information stored before the special chart judgment information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specification command, "one change before" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart judgment information stored one before the special chart judgment information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specification command, and "two changes before" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart judgment information stored two before the special chart judgment information corresponding to the newly received look-ahead specification command.

In the pre-change column, "3 or 7 seconds, missing change" indicates a missing change display (change presentation) with a change time of 3 or 7 seconds, "16 seconds, missing change" indicates a missing change display (change presentation) with a change time of 16 seconds, and "other than the above" indicates a change display (change presentation) with a change time other than 3, 7, or 16 seconds when a big win change display is executed.

The look-ahead reach performance scenarios include a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead reach performance is not executed (e.g., scenario 00), a scenario in which the look-ahead reach performance is executed from the pre-fluctuation one fluctuation before to the current fluctuation (fluctuation performance corresponding to the look-ahead specification command) (e.g., scenario 01), and a scenario in which the look-ahead reach performance is executed from the pre-fluctuation two fluctuations before to the current fluctuation (e.g., scenario 03).

The first feature of the look-ahead reach performance decision table shown in Figures 46 and 47 is that there are cases where the look-ahead reach performance is executed over the pre-change one change before and two change displays (change performances) of the change in question, and cases where the look-ahead reach performance is executed over the pre-change two changes before and three change displays (change performances) of the change in question. This prevents the look-ahead reach performance from becoming monotonous, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead reach effect determination table shown in Figures 46 and 47 is that the look-ahead reach effect is never executed for four or more variable displays (variable effects). By doing so, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the look-ahead reach effect becoming drawn out and the effect of the effect being reduced, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead reach effect determination table shown in Figures 46 and 47 is that if the performance content of the pre-change satisfies the execution conditions (missing change display at 3 seconds, 7 seconds, and 16 seconds), the look-ahead reach effect is executed, whereas if the performance content of the pre-change does not satisfy the execution conditions (other than the missing change display at 3 seconds, 7 seconds, and 16 seconds), the look-ahead reach effect is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as high expectations effects that were scheduled to be executed in the pre-change effect not being executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the look-ahead reach effect determination table shown in Figures 46 and 47 is that if the change (the change effect corresponding to the look-ahead designation command) is a change effect equal to or lower than a normal reach effect, the look-ahead reach effect is not executed, whereas if the change is an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect, which have higher expectations than a normal reach, the look-ahead reach effect is executed. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation regarding whether or not a look-ahead reach effect will be executed, and when a look-ahead reach effect is executed, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the look-ahead reach effect determination table shown in Figures 46 and 47 is that if the change (the change effect corresponding to the look-ahead designation command) is a full rotation reach effect that guarantees a jackpot, the look-ahead reach effect is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of a full rotation reach effect that guarantees a jackpot being executed, and a look-ahead reach effect that does not guarantee a jackpot being executed, thereby making the game more interesting.

(Look-ahead zone performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 48 shows a look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a look-ahead zone presentation scenario.

The look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead zone performance, and the performance scenario of the selected look-ahead zone performance, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead zone performance in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

"Zone" refers to the execution of normal zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a blue zone image, output of zone background music), while "hot zone" refers to the execution of heat zone effects (display of a look-ahead zone background image, display of a red heat zone image, output of heat zone background music) which have a higher chance of winning than normal zone effects.

The look-ahead zone performance scenarios include a non-execution scenario in which the look-ahead zone performance is not executed (e.g., scenario 00), a scenario in which the zone performance is not executed during pre-change but is executed during the change (e.g., scenario 01), and a scenario in which the zone performance is executed during both pre-change and the change (e.g., scenario 02).

The first feature of the look-ahead zone performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that it sets a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone does not progress (change) to a performance mode with a high expectation of a jackpot game being executed, and a performance scenario in which the performance mode of the performance during the zone progresses (changes) to a performance mode with a high expectation of a jackpot game being executed. In this way, it is possible to make the player anticipate whether or not the performance mode of the performance during the zone will progress (change), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead zone presentation scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 is that the presentation mode of the look-ahead zone presentation is more likely to progress (change) with the current change than with prior change. This makes it easier to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a long period of time, and can bring the player's sense of expectation to a climax with the current change, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Preview countdown performance scenario decision table)
FIG. 49 shows a look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table that is referenced when determining a look-ahead countdown performance scenario.

The look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead specification command, the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of the performance scenario for each look-ahead countdown performance, and the performance scenario for the look-ahead countdown performance that will be selected, and for reference, the advance changes in each performance scenario and the performance mode of the look-ahead countdown performance in that change are also listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

"Count 3" means that a count image showing "3" is displayed and a count sound is output, "Count 2" means that a count image showing "2" is displayed and a count sound is output, "Count 1" means that a count image showing "1" is displayed and a count sound is output, and "Count 0" means that a count image showing "0" is displayed and a count sound is output.

The first feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that it is possible to execute the look-ahead countdown performance not only in the case of a big win, but also in the case of a small win (a predicted fluctuation pattern that leads to the expectation of a small win). In this way, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation as to whether or not a small win game will be executed, in which a big win game is executed when the game ball enters the specific area 53, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the maximum count is "3" regardless of whether it is a big win or a small win. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation without being aware of whether it is a big win or a small win, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The third feature of the look-ahead countdown performance scenario determination table shown in FIG. 49 is that the look-ahead countdown performance is performed in the same manner regardless of whether the winning combination is a big win or a small win. This allows the player to feel a sense of anticipation without being aware of whether the winning combination is a big win or a small win, making the game more interesting.

(Variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 50. Fig. 50 is a flowchart of the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

First, in step E321-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E321-2, it determines whether or not there is an execution scenario (other than scenario 00) for the look-ahead reach performance in the sub-RAM 130c. If there is no execution scenario for the look-ahead reach performance, it moves the process to step E321-3, and if there is an execution scenario for the look-ahead reach performance, it moves the process to step E321-4.

In step E321-3, the sub-CPU 130a selects a variable presentation pattern determination table (see Figures 51 to 53) according to the current presentation mode. Details of the variable presentation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E321-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines a variable performance pattern and sets it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the selected variable performance pattern determination table and determines one variable performance pattern from among multiple variable performance patterns based on the type of special symbol corresponding to the variable pattern designation command, the type of variable pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each variable performance pattern.

In step E321-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines a variable presentation pattern according to the pre-read reach presentation scenario and sets it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E321-6, the sub-CPU 130a sets the variable performance pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this variable performance pattern determination process. This causes the variable performance pattern instruction command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance.

(Variable performance pattern determination table)
Figure 51 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for normal presentation modes A to D which is referenced when determining the variable presentation pattern in normal presentation modes A to D (normal game playing state), Figure 52(a) is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for challenge & rush mode which is referenced when determining the variable presentation pattern in challenge mode and rush mode (special 2 time reduction), Figure 52(b) is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for legend mode which is referenced when determining the variable presentation pattern in legend mode, and Figure 53 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for home mode which is referenced when determining the variable presentation pattern in home mode.

As shown in Figures 51 to 53, the variable presentation pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol corresponding to the special symbol variable pattern designation command, the type of special symbol variable pattern, the selection rate (%) of each variable presentation pattern, and the variable presentation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the presentation configuration for each variable presentation pattern is listed.

"Variation" in the performance configuration column indicates that a normal variation display is executed in which no reach state is formed by the performance pattern 70a.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is executed that is shorter than the normal variation display and does not result in a reach state.
"Reach teasing" indicates that a performance is executed to tease out whether or not a reach state will be formed by the performance pattern 70a.

"Pseudo failure" refers to the execution of a pseudo consecutive failure effect in which the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed after a performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the display of a single changing special pattern and then changed again, which indicates whether or not the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed.
"Pseudo success" indicates that after a presentation is performed to tease out whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed, which results in the pseudo consecutive performance being performed.

"N Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach presentation is executed.
"Character SP reach" indicates that an SP reach performance is executed in which a character performance is carried out to determine whether or not the character will accomplish the task.
"Showdown SP reach" indicates that an SP reach effect is executed in which a showdown effect is performed to see whether or not an ally character will win against an enemy character.
"Live SPSP reach" indicates that an SPSP reach effect is executed in which a live singing performance is performed by a specific character.
The "super SPSP reach performance" indicates that an SPSP reach performance is executed, which is a special performance with a higher expectation than a live SPSP reach.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the full rotation reach presentation described above is executed.

"SP symbol temporary stop" indicates that the performance symbol (development symbol) which suggests that an SP reach performance will be executed will temporarily stop.
"SPSP pattern temporary stop" indicates that the performance pattern (SPSP pattern) which suggests that an SPSP reach performance will be executed will temporarily stop.

"SP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed which suggests that an SP reach effect will be executed.
"SPSP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed, which suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed.
"Blackout" indicates that the screen goes black and a blackout effect is executed, suggesting that a full rotation reach will be executed.

"Special effects" refers to the execution of the special effects described above.
"Chance performance" indicates that the above-mentioned chance performance is executed.
A "sudden reach" indicates that a reach effect is suddenly executed using an effect pattern 70a other than "7" without going through a normal reach effect.
"Sudden '7'reach" indicates that a reach effect is suddenly executed using the "7" effect pattern 70a without going through the normal reach effect.
"Challenge performance→failure" indicates that as a result of executing the challenge performance described above, a failure performance is executed, indicating that the challenge has failed.
"Challenge performance→success" indicates that as a result of executing the challenge performance described above, a success performance is executed, indicating that the challenge has been successful.

"CI" indicates that one of a number of cut-in effects with different odds of winning will be executed depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period or the valid period has elapsed.
"Decision → Failure" indicates that depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the passage of the valid period, a decision effect suggesting the result of the jackpot determination is executed, and a failure effect suggesting that the jackpot game will not be played as a result of the decision effect is executed.
Which indicates that.
"Decision → Success" indicates that the above-mentioned deciding effect is executed, and a deciding success effect is executed, which suggests that a jackpot game will be executed as a result of the deciding effect.

"Miss" refers to the formation of a losing result (a losing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result) by the performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers, and then temporarily stopping.
"C pattern miss" indicates that a missing number (a missing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial number) is formed by the performance pattern 70a including characters and numbers and temporarily stops.
The "pattern alignment" refers to the formation of a winning result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") by the numerical performance pattern 70a and then temporarily stopping.
The "c symbol alignment" indicates that the performance symbol 70a including characters and numbers forms a winning number (a big win display pattern such as "222" or "777") and temporarily stops.

"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will stop being displayed is displayed on the image display device.
"V stock consumption performance" indicates that the above-mentioned V stock consumption performance is executed.
"Special symbol stop" indicates that a special symbol indicating the execution of a big win game is stopped and displayed.

The first feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 51 to 53 is that in the normal game presentation mode (normal game state), when the fourth jackpot game is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, a full rotation reach presentation is executed in which the "7" presentation symbol 70a is aligned, indicating that the game will move to the legend mode after the fourth jackpot game ends. By doing so, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when moving to the legend mode, which is a state in which it is confirmed that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 51 to 53 is that when the fourth jackpot game is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol in challenge mode or rush mode (special 2 time reduction), a full rotation reach presentation is executed in which the "7" presentation symbol 70a is aligned, indicating that the game will move to legend mode after the fourth jackpot game ends. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when moving to legend mode, which is a state in which the game will definitely be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 51 to 53 is that in the home mode (special 1 time reduction), when the fourth jackpot game is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, a full rotation reach presentation is executed in which the "7" presentation symbol 70a is aligned, indicating that the game will move to the legend mode after the fourth jackpot game ends. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the game moves to the legend mode, which is a state in which the game will definitely be executed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 51 to 53 is that in Legend Mode (special 2 time reduction), where it is virtually certain that a jackpot game will be played, if a jackpot or small jackpot occurs, a V stock consumption presentation is played without a normal reach presentation. By doing this, it is possible to impress upon the player that a jackpot game will be played in Legend Mode, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

When the fourth jackpot game is executed as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, instead of executing a full rotation reach, the "7" performance symbol 70a may be aligned in a re-draw performance after the SP reach performance is executed so that the "7" performance symbol 70a is ultimately aligned, or the "7" performance symbol 70a may be aligned in a re-draw performance after the SPSP reach performance is executed.

(Performance pattern related to a pre-reading reach performance scenario in which the SP reach performance is executed)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a presentation pattern relating to a pre-reading reach presentation scenario in which a SP reach presentation is executed.

As mentioned above, the pre-reading reach effect is an effect that makes multiple fluctuation effects look like a single reach fluctuation effect, provided that the previous and second previous pre-fluctuations are misses and the fluctuation time is 3, 7, or 16 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), a normal SP reach presentation pattern in which a pre-reading reach presentation is not executed is a presentation that is completed in one variable presentation, where the display of the presentation pattern 70a begins to change with the start of the variable presentation, the normal reach presentation starts after a predetermined time has passed, and after the SP pattern temporarily stops in the central variable display area, the SP development presentation is executed and the character SP reach presentation or showdown SP reach presentation is executed. Note that although the case where the SP pattern temporarily stops has been explained here, there are also cases where the SP development presentation is executed without the SP pattern temporarily stopping.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), the look-ahead reach performance according to look-ahead reach performance scenario 01 is a scenario in which two fluctuation performances are made to look like one SP reach fluctuation performance, and the display of the fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a begins with the start of the pre-fluctuation before the previous fluctuation, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a normal reach performance begins, the SP pattern temporarily stops in the central fluctuation display area and then stops and is displayed, and with the start of the fluctuation, the central fluctuation display area changes again, an SP development performance is executed, and a character SP reach performance or a showdown SP reach performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 54(c), the look-ahead reach performance according to look-ahead reach performance scenario 02 is a scenario that makes two fluctuation performances appear as if they are one SP reach fluctuation performance, and the fluctuation display of the performance pattern 70a begins with the start of the pre-fluctuation before the previous fluctuation, and after a predetermined time has passed, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed and the performance pattern 70a changes again, and after that predetermined time has passed, a normal reach performance begins, the SP pattern temporarily stops in the central fluctuation display area and then stops and is displayed, and with the start of the fluctuation, the central fluctuation display area changes again, an SP development performance is executed, and a character SP reach performance or a showdown SP reach performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 54(d), the look-ahead reach performance according to look-ahead reach performance scenario 03 is a scenario that makes three fluctuation performances appear as if they were one SP reach fluctuation performance, and the display of the fluctuation of performance pattern 70a begins with the start of the pre-fluctuation two fluctuations prior, a normal reach performance begins after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the SP pattern temporarily stops in the central fluctuation display area and then stops. Then, with the start of the pre-fluctuation one fluctuation prior, the central fluctuation display area changes again, an SP development performance is executed, and the first half of the character SP reach performance or showdown SP reach performance is executed. After that, the performance pattern 70a that will be a miss is stopped and displayed in the central fluctuation display area, and with the start of that fluctuation, the central fluctuation display area changes again, and the second half of the character SP reach performance or showdown SP reach performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 54(e), the look-ahead reach performance by look-ahead reach performance scenario 04 is a scenario that makes three fluctuation performances appear as if they were one SP reach fluctuation performance, and the fluctuation display of the performance pattern 70a begins with the start of the pre-fluctuation two fluctuations ago, and after a predetermined time has passed, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed and the performance pattern 70a fluctuates again, and after that predetermined time has passed, a normal reach performance begins, and the SP pattern temporarily stops in the central fluctuation display area and then stops. Then, with the start of the pre-fluctuation one fluctuation ago, the central fluctuation display area changes again, an SP development performance is executed, and the first half of the character SP reach performance or showdown SP reach performance is executed. After that, the performance pattern 70a that will be a miss is stopped and displayed in the central fluctuation display area, and with the start of that fluctuation, the central fluctuation display area changes again, and the second half of the character SP reach performance or showdown SP reach performance is executed.

The period A in FIG. 54 is the period during which the dialogue preview performance executed before the start of the normal reach performance can be executed (the execution restriction period for the roulette preview performance, cut-in performance, and deciding performance), the period B is the period during which the roulette preview performance executed during the normal reach performance can be executed (the execution restriction period for the dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, and deciding performance), the period C is the period during which the cut-in preview performance executed during the SP reach performance can be executed (the execution restriction period for the dialogue preview performance, roulette preview performance, and deciding performance), and the period D is the period during which the cut-in preview performance executed during the SP reach performance can be executed (the execution restriction period for the dialogue preview performance, roulette preview performance, and cut-in performance).

(Performance pattern related to a pre-reading reach performance scenario in which the SPSP reach performance is executed)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a presentation pattern relating to a pre-reading reach presentation scenario in which an SPSP reach presentation is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), a normal SPSP reach presentation pattern in which a pre-reading reach presentation is not executed is a presentation that is completed in one variable presentation, where the display of the variable presentation pattern 70a begins to change with the start of the variable presentation, and after a predetermined time has passed, a normal reach presentation begins, and after the SP pattern temporarily stops in the central variable display area, an SP development presentation is executed, a character SP reach presentation or a showdown SP reach presentation is executed, and the losing presentation pattern 70a temporarily stops in the central variable display area. After that, the central variable display area changes again, an SPSP development presentation is executed, and a live SPSP reach presentation is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), the look-ahead reach performance according to look-ahead reach performance scenario 11 is a scenario in which two fluctuation performances are made to look as if they were one SPSP reach fluctuation performance, and the display of the fluctuation of performance pattern 70a begins with the start of the pre-fluctuation before the previous fluctuation, and after a predetermined time has passed, a normal reach performance begins, the SP pattern temporarily stops in the central fluctuation display area and then stops and is displayed, and with the start of the fluctuation, the central fluctuation display area changes again, an SP development performance is executed, a character SP reach performance or a showdown SP reach performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a that is a loser is temporarily stopped in the central fluctuation display area. After that, the central fluctuation display area changes again, an SPSP development performance is executed, and a live SPSP reach performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(c), the look-ahead reach performance according to look-ahead reach performance scenario 11 is a scenario that makes two fluctuation performances appear as if they were one SPSP reach fluctuation performance, and the fluctuation display of the performance pattern 70a begins with the start of the pre-fluctuation before the first fluctuation, and after a predetermined time has passed, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed and the performance pattern 70a fluctuates again, and after that predetermined time has passed, a normal reach performance begins, the SP pattern temporarily stops in the central fluctuation display area and then stops and is displayed, and with the start of the fluctuation, the central fluctuation display area changes again, an SP development performance is executed, a character SP reach performance or a showdown SP reach performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a that is a loser is temporarily stopped in the central fluctuation display area. After that, the central fluctuation display area changes again, an SPSP development performance is executed, and a live SPSP reach performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(d), the look-ahead reach performance by the look-ahead reach performance scenario 13 is a scenario that makes three change performances appear as if they were one SPSP reach change performance, and the change display of the performance pattern 70a starts with the start of the pre-change two changes before, the normal reach performance starts after a predetermined time has passed, and the SP pattern is temporarily stopped in the central change display area and then stopped. Then, with the start of the pre-change one change before, the central change display area changes again, the SP development performance is executed, and the character SP reach performance or the showdown SP reach performance is executed. After that, the performance pattern 70a that will be a loss is stopped and displayed in the central change display area, and with the start of the change, the central change display area changes again, the latter half of the character SP reach performance or the showdown SP reach performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a that will be a loss is temporarily stopped in the central change display area. Furthermore, the central change display area changes again, the SPSP development performance is executed, and the live SPSP reach performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 55(e), the look-ahead reach performance by look-ahead reach performance scenario 13 is a scenario that makes three fluctuation performances appear as if they were one SPSP reach fluctuation performance, and the fluctuation display of the performance pattern 70a begins with the start of the pre-fluctuation two fluctuations ago, and after a predetermined time has passed, a pseudo consecutive performance is executed and the performance pattern 70a fluctuates again, and after that predetermined time has passed, a normal reach performance begins, and the SP pattern is temporarily stopped in the central fluctuation display area and then stopped. Then, with the start of the pre-fluctuation one fluctuation ago, the central fluctuation display area is again changed, an SP development performance is executed, and a character SP reach performance or a showdown SP reach performance is executed. After that, the performance pattern 70a that will be a loss is stopped and displayed in the central fluctuation display area, and with the start of the fluctuation, the central fluctuation display area is again changed, and the latter half of the character SP reach performance or the showdown SP reach performance is executed, and the performance pattern 70a that will be a loss is temporarily stopped in the central fluctuation display area. Furthermore, the central variable display area changes again, the SPSP development performance is executed, and the live SPSP reach performance is executed.

In addition, the period A in FIG. 55 is the period during which pre-reach preview performances such as line preview performances can be executed (period during which the execution of roulette preview performances, cut-in performances, and deciding performances is restricted), the period B is the period during which normal reach preview performances such as roulette preview performances can be executed (period during which the execution of pre-reach preview performances is restricted), the period C is the period during which the execution of cut-in preview performances executed during SP reach performances is restricted, the period D is the period during which the cut-in preview performances executed during SP reach performances can be executed, and the period E is the period during which the execution of deciding performances executed during SPSP reach performances is restricted (period during which the execution of line preview performances, roulette preview performances, and cut-in performances is restricted).

In this way, according to the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, it is possible to execute a normal reach presentation (first specific presentation) in one variable presentation based on the jackpot determination result, and then execute an SP reach presentation (second specific presentation). If it is determined in advance that an SP reach presentation (second specific presentation) will be executed while there is a reserved memory, a normal reach presentation (first specific presentation) is executed in the variable presentation one before the SP reach is executed, and in the next variable presentation, it is possible to execute an SP reach presentation (second specific presentation) without executing a normal reach presentation (first specific presentation). Therefore, it is possible to execute an unprecedented and innovative variable presentation, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by distributing (dividing) a series of presentations from the normal reach presentation to the SP reach presentation over multiple variable presentations, it is possible to make it look as if one variable presentation is being executed, and it is also possible to shorten the presentation time for each variable presentation, which makes it possible to improve the execution efficiency of the variable presentation.

In addition, according to the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, it is possible to execute a presentation (normal SPSP reach presentation) in which, based on the result of the jackpot determination, a normal reach presentation (first specific presentation) is performed in one variation presentation, followed by an SP reach presentation (second specific presentation), and then an SPSP reach presentation (third specific presentation) is executed. Based on the result of the advance determination (foresight), it is possible to execute a presentation in which a normal reach presentation (first specific presentation) is executed in the variation presentation one time before the predicted target (the variation presentation corresponding to the advance determination result), an SP reach presentation is executed without executing a normal reach presentation in the variation presentation of the predicted target, and then an SPSP reach presentation is executed (foresight SPSP reach presentation). Therefore, it is possible to execute novel variation presentations that have never been performed before, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

According to the presentation patterns shown in FIG. 54 and FIG. 55, based on the jackpot determination result, in one variable presentation, after performing a normal reach presentation (first specific presentation), the first half presentation (first period presentation) of the SP reach presentation (second specific presentation) is performed, and then the second half presentation (second period presentation) of the SP reach presentation (second specific presentation) can be performed. If it is determined in advance that the SP reach presentation (second specific presentation) will be performed while there is a reserved memory, in the variable presentation one before the SP reach presentation (second specific presentation), the first half presentation (first period presentation) of the SP reach presentation is performed after performing the normal reach presentation (first specific presentation), and in the next variable presentation, the second period presentation (second half presentation) of the SP reach presentation (second specific presentation) can be performed without performing the normal reach presentation (first specific presentation) and the first half presentation (first period presentation) of the SP reach presentation (second specific presentation). Therefore, it is possible to perform an unprecedented and novel variable presentation, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Relationship between the combination of performance patterns and the executed skill performance)
Figure 56 is a diagram showing the relationship between combinations of performance symbols and the skill performances executed.

A "skill effect" is an effect that triggers various expectation effects that raise the expectation of a jackpot game being played in conjunction with the display (temporary stop, stopped display) of a specific combination of effect patterns.

The various types of expectation effects include the icon change effect mentioned above (pending icon change effect, icon change effect), the device power charge effect that charges power to the first movable member 73a that operates during the deciding effect (causing it to emit light in a specified light-emitting mode), the above-mentioned look-ahead zone effect (activating a zone effect, changing the expectation level of the zone effect), a timer effect that suggests the timing of the execution of a specified effect, and a super hot display effect that suggests a high expectation of a result favorable to the player.

When the combinations of the effect patterns 70a "11X", "1X1", and "X11" are displayed (temporarily stopped, permanently stopped), a skill effect is executed to activate an icon change effect.
When the combinations of the performance patterns 70a "22X", "2X2", and "X22" are displayed (temporarily stopped, permanently stopped), a skill performance is executed to activate a role power charge performance.
When the combinations of the performance patterns 70a "33X", "3X3", and "X33" are displayed (temporarily stopped, actually stopped), a skill performance is executed to activate the look-ahead zone performance.

When the combinations of the performance patterns 70a "44X", "4X4", and "X44" are displayed (temporarily stopped, permanently stopped), a skill performance is executed to activate a role power charge performance.
When the combinations of the performance patterns 70a "55X", "5X5", and "X55" are displayed (temporarily stopped, permanently stopped), a skill performance is executed to activate a timer performance.
When the combinations of the performance patterns 70a "66X", "6X6", and "X66" are displayed (temporarily stopped, permanently stopped), a skill performance is executed to activate a role power charge performance.

When the combinations of the performance patterns 70a "77X", "7X7", and "X77" are displayed (temporarily stopped, permanently stopped), a skill effect is executed to activate the super hot display effect.
When the combinations of the performance patterns 70a "88X", "8X8", and "X88" are displayed (temporarily stopped, permanently stopped), a skill performance is executed to activate a role power charge performance.
When the combinations of the performance patterns 70a "99X", "9X9", and "X99" are displayed (temporarily stopped, permanently stopped), a skill performance is executed to activate a timer performance.

In addition, with regard to the "X" combination of the effect symbols 70a, in addition to the case where it is being displayed in a changing manner, any of the effect symbols 1 to 9 may be displayed temporarily or stopped.

In this way, while the variable effects are being performed, it is possible to execute skill effects that activate various expectation effects that create the expectation of a big win game. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect and sense of expectation compared to when expectation effects are simply executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when a variable effect is being performed, a skill effect is executed in connection with the display (temporary stop, stopped display) of a specific combination of effect patterns. This increases the player's anticipation as to whether or not a specific combination of effect patterns will be displayed, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, skill effects are executed that correspond to the types of combinations (outcomes) of specific effect patterns. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the types of combinations (outcomes) of specific effect patterns displayed in the variable effects, thereby making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, during the execution of the variable performance, if a first combination of performance symbols (for example, a combination including two performance symbols 70a of "1") is displayed (temporarily stopped, stopped display), a first skill performance (icon change performance) can be executed, and if a second combination of performance symbols (for example, a combination including two performance symbols 70a of "2" or "4" or "8") is displayed (temporarily stopped, stopped display), a second skill performance (gimmick power charge performance) can be executed, and if a third combination of performance symbols 70a (for example, a combination including two performance symbols 70a of "3") is displayed (temporarily stopped, stopped display), a second skill performance (gimmick power charge performance) can be executed. When a combination of effect symbols (a combination including two "5" or "9" effect symbols 70a) is displayed (temporarily stopped, stopped display), a third skill effect (zone effect) can be executed, when a fourth combination of effect symbols (a combination including two "5" or "9" effect symbols 70a) is displayed (temporarily stopped, stopped display), a fourth skill effect (timer effect) can be executed, and when a fifth combination of effect symbols (a combination including two "7" effect symbols 70a) is displayed (temporarily stopped, stopped display), a fifth skill effect (super hot display effect) can be executed. Therefore, a wide variety of skill effects can be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The types of combinations (outcomes) of specific symbols that trigger skill effects include those that result in reach outcomes (e.g., "1X1"). Therefore, skill effects can be executed in conjunction with the execution of reach effects that arouse player expectations, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, the types of combinations (outcomes) of specific symbols that trigger skill effects include some that do not result in a winning combination (such as "1X1"). Therefore, even in variable effects that display losing outcomes, the player can be kept hopeful until the very end, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when it comes to skill effects, variable effects that execute pseudo consecutive effects are more likely to be executed (the execution rate is higher) than variable effects that do not. Therefore, the synergistic effect with the pseudo consecutive effects can effectively heighten the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, skill effects can be performed in conjunction with predictive reach effects. This creates a synergistic effect with predictive skill effects, effectively heightening the player's sense of anticipation and making the game more enjoyable.

(Example of a performance when two types of skill performances are executed in a variable performance)
An example of a performance in which two types of skill performances are executed in a variation performance will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Here, it is assumed that a skill performance related to an icon change performance and a skill performance related to a timer performance are executed.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), a variable effect (variable display of effect pattern 70a and first special pattern TZ1) is being executed to execute the Showdown SP reach effect, and the icon TI in question, which is in the normal display mode (white icon), and one reserved icon HI are displayed.

When a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the "1" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right fluctuation display areas, a reach result is displayed, and a skill effect related to the icon change effect (a type of expectation effect) is executed, changing the icon TI from a white icon to a blue icon. Specifically, an effect image is wrapped around the number of the "1" effect pattern 70a, suggesting that a specific effect pattern combination (here, "1X1") has been achieved, and in conjunction with the movement of the character of the "1" effect pattern 70a, a skill activation image ("1" (change) skill activation) is displayed and a voice saying "skill activation" is output. Then, an action effect is performed on the icon TI starting from the skill activation image, and the display state of the icon TI changes.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(c), the pseudo symbol ("NEXT") in the central variable display area, which indicates the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance, is temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 57(d), all performance symbols 70a change again.

When a predetermined time has passed since the re-fluctuation started, as shown in FIG. 57(e), when the "5" effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right fluctuation display areas and a reach result is displayed, a skill effect related to the timer effect is executed and the timer effect is activated. Specifically, an effect image is wrapped around the numbers of the "5" effect pattern 70a to suggest that a specific combination of effect patterns has been achieved, and in conjunction with the movement of the character of the "5" effect pattern 70a, a skill activation image ("5" (change) skill activated) is displayed and a voice saying "skill activated" is output. Then, an action effect is performed starting from the skill activation image, and a timer image TM showing "5 seconds" is displayed.

Then, when two seconds have passed since the timer image was displayed, the number of seconds on the timer image TM indicates "3 seconds" as shown in FIG. 57(f), and when five seconds have passed since the timer image was displayed while the SP development performance is being executed as shown in FIG. 57(g), the number of seconds on the timer image TM indicates "0 seconds", and the Showdown SP reach performance, the execution timing of which was suggested by the timer performance, begins and the timer image TM is erased as shown in FIG. 57(h). Also, the icon TI changes from a blue icon to a red icon.

After that, when the Showdown SP Reach performance reaches its final stage, a cut-in performance is executed as shown in FIG. 57(i). Specifically, a cut-in image CI including a character is displayed and a cut-in sound effect is output along with the voice saying "Chance to win!".

When the cut-in effect execution period ends, the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the aligned state, as shown in FIG. 57(j). Then, when the temporary stop time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is displayed as stopped, and the big win game effect begins.

In this way, in the skill effect that is executed in connection with the display of the effect pattern 70a that results in a specific combination (outcome), an effect is executed using the character of the displayed effect pattern 70a. This makes it easier to understand the relationship between the type of effect pattern 70a and the expected effect that is triggered by the skill effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, multiple skill effects can be executed during one variable effect, and the same skill effect may be executed or different skill effects may be executed. This increases the player's anticipation as to which skill effect will be executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Example 1 of a performance when a pre-reading reach performance is executed)
A description will be given of a performance example 1 in which a pre-reading reach performance is executed using Fig. 58. Here, it is assumed that a pre-reading reach performance is executed over two variable performances by a pre-reading reach performance scenario 01.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), a variable performance (variable display of performance pattern 70a and first special pattern TZ1) is being executed based on the normal variable performance pattern. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting hole A45 and the first reserved number becomes "2", the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "2" and an animation of an increase in the reserved icon (here, the blue icon that is the target of the pre-reading reach performance) is executed in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, when the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58(b), a combination of performance patterns 70a including the "3" performance pattern 70a on the center and left side is displayed frozen, the icon TI is erased, and with the start of the next change performance, a skill performance related to the look-ahead zone performance (a type of expectation performance) is executed, and the zone performance is executed. Specifically, an effect image is wrapped around the number of the "3" performance pattern 70a, suggesting that a specific performance pattern combination (here, "X33") has been achieved.

As shown in FIG. 58(c), when a change performance (display of the change of performance pattern 70a and first special pattern TZ1) begins, which is a pre-change before one change of the look-ahead reach performance, a skill activation image ("3" (zone) skill activation) is displayed in association with the movement of the character of performance pattern 70a for "3" and a sound saying "skill activation" is output. Then, an action performance starting from the skill activation image is performed and a zone performance (display of zone image ZG and zone background image, output of zone BGM) begins.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(d), when the "5" effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right variable display areas and a reach result is displayed, a skill effect related to the timer effect is executed and the timer effect is activated. Specifically, an effect image is wrapped around the numbers of the "5" effect pattern 70a to suggest that a specific combination of effect patterns has been achieved, and in conjunction with the movement of the character of the "5" effect pattern 70a, a skill activation image ("5" (change) skill activated) is displayed and the sound "skill activated" is output. Then, an action effect is performed starting from the skill activation image, and a timer image TM showing "5 seconds" is displayed.

After that, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the SP symbol ("SP Development"), which indicates that a SP reach performance will be executed, and the first special symbol TZ1, which is a reach miss result, are displayed statically in the central variable display area, and the icon TI is erased. At this time, the number of seconds on the timer image TM indicates "1 second."

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58(f), the change performance (the change display of the performance pattern 70a in the central change display area and the first special pattern TZ1) that is the change of the pre-reading SP reach performance is started, and the blue icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B shifts to the icon display area 70C and changes to a red icon. Also, when five seconds have elapsed since the display of the timer image TM, the number of seconds on the timer image indicates "0 seconds," and as shown in FIG. 58(g), the showdown SP reach performance, the execution timing of which is suggested by the timer performance, is started and the timer image TM is erased.

After that, when the Showdown SP Reach performance reaches its final stage, a cut-in performance is executed as shown in FIG. 58(h). Specifically, a cut-in image CI including a character is displayed and a cut-in sound effect is output along with the voice saying "Chance to win!".

When the cut-in effect ends, the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the aligned state, as shown in FIG. 58(i). Then, when the eye-catching effect is executed and the temporary stop time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is displayed as stopped, as shown in FIG. 58(j), and the big win game effect begins.

In the case of the pre-reading reach performance scenario 11 in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, the performance pattern 70a which is the reach miss result is temporarily stopped in FIG. 58(i), and then the development performance to the SPSP reach performance is executed, the first reserved icon display area 70B and/or the icon display area 70C are hidden, the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area starts to change display, and the SPSP reach performance starts. After that, the performance pattern 70a which is the reach miss result or the jackpot result is temporarily stopped, an eye-catching performance is executed, the first reserved icon display area 70B and/or the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and when the temporary stop time has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a is stopped and the jackpot game performance starts.

In this way, in the pre-change performance one change before the target change of the look-ahead SP reach performance, the SP symbols are displayed stationary to make it look like the performance continues into the next change performance, and at the start of the change performance of the look-ahead SP reach performance, only the central change display area is changed again to start the SP reach performance. This makes it easier to make multiple change performances appear as a single change performance, improving the performance effect of the look-ahead reach performance and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to execute a timer effect, which is a type of expectation effect, from the pre-change effect one change before the target change of the look-ahead SP reach effect to the change effect that is the target change. This makes it easier to show multiple change effects as a single change effect, improving the effect of the look-ahead reach effect and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the variable performance that is the target variable of the pre-reading SP reach performance, only the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area is displayed so that the SP reach performance starts without going through the normal reach performance. Therefore, it is easier to show multiple variable performances as one variable performance compared to when the variable display of all performance patterns 70a is started, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pre-reading reach performance and increase the interest of the game.

Note that while the first hold icon display area 70B and the hold icon are displayed while the SP reach performance is being executed, the first hold icon display area 70B and the hold icon may be hidden while the SP reach performance is being executed, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the hold icon may be redisplayed after the eye-catching performance is executed, or, when an SP reach performance related to a pre-reading reach performance is executed, the first hold icon display area 70B and the hold icon may be displayed while the SP reach performance is being executed, and, when an SP reach performance not related to a pre-reading SP reach performance is executed, the first hold icon display area 70B and the hold icon may be hidden while the SP reach performance is being executed.

(Example 2 of a performance when a pre-reading reach performance is executed)
58 and 59, a description will be given of a second example of a performance in which a look-ahead reach effect is executed. Here, it is assumed that a look-ahead reach effect is executed over three variable effects by a look-ahead reach effect scenario 03.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), a variable performance (variable display of performance pattern 70a and first special pattern TZ1) is being executed based on the normal variable performance pattern. Then, when a game ball enters the first starting hole A45 and the first reserved number becomes "2", the first reserved number display area 70E becomes "2" and an animation of an increase in the reserved icon (here, the reserved icon that is the target of the pre-reading reach performance) is executed in the second display section of the first reserved icon display area 70B.

Then, when the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58(b), a combination of performance patterns 70a including the "3" performance pattern 70a on the center and left side is displayed frozen, the icon TI is erased, and with the start of the next change performance, a skill performance related to the look-ahead zone performance (a type of expectation performance) is executed, and the zone performance is executed. Specifically, an effect image is wrapped around the number of the "3" performance pattern 70a, suggesting that a specific performance pattern combination (here, "X33") has been achieved.

As shown in FIG. 58(c), when a change performance (display of the change of performance pattern 70a and first special pattern TZ1) begins, which is a pre-change two changes before the look-ahead reach performance, a skill activation image ("3" (zone) skill activation) is displayed in association with the movement of the character of performance pattern 70a for "3" and the sound "skill activation" is output. Then, an action performance starting from the skill activation image is performed and a zone performance (display of zone image ZG and zone background image, output of zone BGM) begins.

Then, as shown in FIG. 58(d), when the "5" effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right variable display areas and a reach result is displayed, a skill effect related to the timer effect is executed and the timer effect is activated. Specifically, an effect image is wrapped around the numbers of the "5" effect pattern 70a to suggest that a specific combination of effect patterns has been achieved, and in conjunction with the movement of the character of the "5" effect pattern 70a, a skill activation image ("5" (change) skill activated) is displayed and the sound "skill activated" is output. Then, an action effect is performed starting from the skill activation image, and a timer image TM showing "5 seconds" is displayed.

After that, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the SP symbol ("SP Development"), which indicates that a SP reach performance will be executed, and the first special symbol TZ1, which is a reach miss result, are displayed statically in the central variable display area, and the icon TI is erased. At this time, the number of seconds on the timer image TM indicates "1 second."

Then, when the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59(f), a change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a in the central change display area and the first special pattern TZ1) which is a pre-change before the pre-reading SP reach performance starts, and the reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C. Also, when five seconds have elapsed since the timer image was displayed, the number of seconds on the timer image TM indicates "0 seconds," and as shown in FIG. 59(g), the first half of the showdown SP reach performance, the execution timing of which was suggested by the timer performance, starts and the timer image TM is erased.

In addition, in the first half of the Showdown SP reach effect, as shown in FIG. 59(h), an effect is performed in which the ally character and enemy character launch a slashing attack, and when the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59(i), the effect pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 stop displaying a reach miss result, and the icon TI is erased.

After that, when the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 59(j), the change performance (the change display of the first special symbol TZ1) that is the change of the pre-reading SP reach performance starts, and the blue icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B shifts to the icon display area 70C and changes to a red icon. In addition, the development performance to the latter half of the confrontation SP reach performance is executed. Specifically, the latter half development symbol (the "next match" symbol) is displayed in the central change display area.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59(k), the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area starts to change, and a text image saying "This is about to begin!" is displayed, suggesting that the second half of the Showdown SP reach effect is about to begin, and as shown in FIG. 59(l), an effect is performed in which the ally character and enemy character launch slashing attacks.

When the latter half of the Showdown SP Reach performance reaches its final stage, a cut-in performance is executed as shown in FIG. 59(m). Specifically, a cut-in image CI including a character is displayed and the sound "Chance to win!" is output together with a cut-in sound effect.

When the execution period of the cut-in effect ends, the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the aligned state, as shown in FIG. 59(n). Then, when the eye-catching effect is executed and the temporary stop time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is displayed as stopped, as shown in FIG. 59(o), and the big win game effect begins.

In the case of the pre-reading reach performance scenario 13 in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, the performance pattern 70a which is the reach miss result is temporarily stopped in FIG. 59 (n), and then the development performance to the SPSP reach performance is executed, the first reserved icon display area 70B and/or the icon display area 70C are hidden, the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area starts to change display, and the SPSP reach performance starts. After that, the performance pattern 70a which is the reach miss result or the jackpot result is temporarily stopped, an eye-catching performance is executed, the first reserved icon display area 70B and/or the icon display area 70C are redisplayed, and when the temporary stop time has elapsed, the performance pattern 70a is stopped and the jackpot game performance starts.

In this way, in the pre-change performance two changes before the target change of the look-ahead SP reach performance, the SP symbols are displayed stationary to make it look like the performance continues with the next change performance, and at the start of the change performance of the look-ahead SP reach performance, only the central change display area is changed again to start the SP reach performance. This makes it easier to make multiple change performances appear as a single change performance, improving the performance effect of the look-ahead reach performance and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to execute a timer effect, which is a type of expectation effect, from the pre-change effect two changes before the target change of the look-ahead SP reach effect to the change effect that is the target change. This makes it easier to show multiple change effects as a single change effect, improving the effect of the look-ahead reach effect and increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the change performance that is a pre-change one change before the target change of the look-ahead SP reach performance, only the performance pattern 70a in the central change display area is displayed in a change so that the SP reach performance starts without going through the normal reach performance. Therefore, it is easier to show multiple change performances as one change performance compared to when the change display of all performance patterns 70a is started, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the look-ahead reach performance and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the variable performance that is the target variable of the pre-reading SP reach performance, only the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area is displayed so that the latter half of the SP reach performance starts without going through the normal reach performance. Therefore, it is easier to show multiple variable performances as one variable performance compared to when the variable display of all performance patterns 70a is started, and it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pre-reading reach performance and increase the interest of the game.

(Example of the transition from Challenge Mode to Home Mode)
Using Figures 60 and 61, we will explain an example of the presentation when transitioning from the challenge mode (first time-shortened gaming state) to the home mode (fourth time-shortened gaming state).

As shown in FIG. 60(a), when the ending of the first big win game starts, the right-hit small image MG1 displayed during the round game and the number of balls KT and the number of big wins AK during the series of advantageous periods (the period during which the advantageous period continues from the so-called first win) are displayed, and a challenge mode entry effect (transition effect) is performed indicating that the game will enter challenge mode (first time-saving game state), and a warning notification is executed to draw the player's attention. Specifically, a text image saying "Challenge mode entry" is displayed, and a forget-to-remove warning image TG is displayed to prevent players from forgetting to remove a storage medium (such as a card that can identify the remaining value of the player's possession) from the lending device that communicates with the gaming machine 1 to lend game balls.

After that, when the display period for the forgetting to retrieve warning image TG has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60(b), an addiction warning image NG is displayed to warn the player not to become too addicted to the game, and a large right-hit image MG2 is displayed to encourage the player to save reserved memory by hitting the right button.

Then, after the ending period has elapsed and the challenge mode entry effect (transition effect) has ended, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, the second reserved number (U2) increases to "1", and immediately afterwards the second reserved number (U2) is subtracted to "0", as shown in Figure 60 (c), a variable effect is started in which only the second special pattern TZ2 is displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the start of the variable display of the second special pattern, and a challenge effect is started which can be executed over multiple variable effects (until the end of the variable display of the second special pattern which is executed with the remaining second reserved number (U2) when the first time-saving game state has ended). Specifically, the first time-saving game state is maintained until the variable presentation ends, and the second reserved number (U2) can be increased by winning a game ball in the second starting hole 47. As the second reserved number (U2) accumulates, a countdown (initial value is 20 seconds) of the time limit GG until the transition to the challenge result presentation begins is started, and the four panel icons corresponding to the upper limit of the second reserved number (U2) are displayed in an inactive state (non-notification mode).

When one game ball enters the second starting hole 47 in this state, as shown in FIG. 60(d), one panel icon IC1 that was displayed in an inactive state is displayed as active (displayed in an alert mode) in a manner that suggests the expectation of a result (small win or big win) favorable to the player. Specifically, depending on the result of the advance reading of the second reserved number (U2), one to four star marks are displayed on the panel icon according to the expectation (the more star marks there are, the higher the expectation, but the expectation is displayed at a lower level than the actual expectation at the initial display stage).

Furthermore, when three game balls enter the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 60(e), the remaining three panel icons IC2 to IC4, which were displayed in an inactive state, are displayed in an active state in a manner that suggests the likelihood of a favorable result (small win or big win) for the player.

After that, if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 before the time limit GG has elapsed, the second reserved number (U2) will not increase but will overflow, but as shown in FIG. 60(f), a promotion effect is produced for the actively displayed panel icon IC. Specifically, if the player wins the promotion lottery that is held every time a game ball enters the second start hole 47, an action effect is produced for the actively displayed panel icon IC, and an effect is produced in which the number of star marks according to the actual degree of expectation is increased, accompanied by an effect image. On the other hand, if the player loses the promotion lottery, an action effect is produced for the actively displayed panel icon IC, but an effect is produced in which the number of star marks is maintained.

Then, when the time limit GG has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60(g), the effect button 17 is operated the number of times for the variable effect to notify the result, and a challenge result effect is started to notify the result by operating the effect button 17 or by the elapse of the valid time. Specifically, in the variable effect corresponding to the first variable display of the second special pattern, the effect pattern 70a forming a reach state is displayed, and an operation prompting image SG (effect button image + remaining valid time image) to prompt the user to operate the effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60(h), a failure effect is performed in which the character image "Sorry..." is displayed and the effect symbol 70a, which is a losing number, is temporarily stopped, and when the variable time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped as a special losing special symbol, and the second special symbol TZ2 is stopped as a special losing number ("505" with a "0" in the middle symbol). At this time, the first time-saving game state ends when the second special symbol starts to be stopped, and when the stopped time has elapsed, the game transitions to the fourth time-saving game state, but at this point, the home mode entry effect (transition effect) that suggests that the game will enter the home mode corresponding to the fourth time-saving game state is not executed.

In addition, if the second reserved number (U2) remains when the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) is transitioned (switched) to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving), the remaining number of time-saving plays ZK will not be displayed even when transitioning to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving). Also, even when transitioning from the first time-saving game state to the fourth time-saving game state, the time-saving game state that requires right-hitting will continue, so the right-hitting small image MG1 will continue to be displayed (without a sticker).

Furthermore, when a change effect corresponding to the first change display of the second special pattern among the remaining reserved number of second special patterns is started, as shown in FIG. 60(i), the effect pattern 70a forming a reach state is displayed and a sudden reach effect is started, and the first panel icon IC1 that was actively displayed changes to an operation prompt image SG and a star mark is displayed next to it.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 60(j), a failure effect is performed in which the character image "Too bad..." is displayed and the effect pattern 70a, which is a losing number, is temporarily stopped, and when the variable time has elapsed, the second special pattern is stopped as a special losing special pattern, and the second special pattern TZ2 is stopped as a special losing number ("606" with a "0" in the middle pattern). At this time, the fourth time-saving game state ends (the normal game state begins) when the second special pattern starts to be stopped, and when the stop time has elapsed, the game transitions again to the fourth time-saving game state, but at this point, the home mode entry effect (transition effect) that suggests that the game will be in the home mode corresponding to the fourth time-saving game state is not executed. Also, even when transitioning from the fourth time-saving game state to the fourth time-saving game state, the time-saving game state that requires right hitting will continue, so the right-hitting small image MG1 continues to be displayed (seamlessly).

After that, in the variation presentation corresponding to the second to fourth variation display of the second special symbol out of the remaining reserved number of second special symbols, the same presentation (progression of the game state) as in Figures 60(i) to 60(h) is performed, as shown in Figures 61(k) to 61(m).

In addition, in the variation effect corresponding to the fourth variation display of the second special symbol among the remaining reserved number of second special symbols, as shown in FIG. 61(o), after the failure effect is performed, a result display is performed showing the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods (the period during which the player is in a favorable state from the first win). Specifically, the following are displayed: "BONUS x 1" showing the number of jackpot games, a text image of "300pt" showing the number of prize balls paid out, and "NEXT HOME MODE" announcing the transition to HOME MODE (fourth time-saving game state).

After the variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed as a special miss special symbol, and the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed as a special miss number ("606" including a "0" in the middle symbol). At this time, the fourth time-saving game state ends (the normal game state begins) when the second special symbol starts to be displayed, and when the stop time has elapsed, the game transitions again to the fourth time-saving game state (return home mode).

After that, when the second reserved number (U2) is "0" and the variable effect corresponding to the normal miss variable display of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 61 (p), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 starts, and the first reserved icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C are displayed again, and a home mode entry effect (transition effect) is executed, suggesting a transition to the home mode (fourth time-shortened game state). At this time, the remaining time-shortened number of times ZK corresponding to the special 1 time-shortened number of times (J1) is displayed as "50 times remaining," and since a series of advantageous periods favorable to the player continues, the number of balls acquired KT and the number of jackpots AK remain displayed.

Then, when the variation time has elapsed after three game balls have entered the first starting hole B46, as shown in FIG. 61(q), the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 stop and display a losing result ("814"), and the icon TI is erased.

In addition, when the variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern starts, as shown in FIG. 61(r), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the first special pattern TZ1 starts, each pending icon HI is shifted and one is displayed as the corresponding icon TI, and the remaining number of time-saving plays ZK is updated from "49 plays remaining" to "48 plays remaining."

Then, when the variable time has elapsed after two game balls have entered the first starting hole B46, as shown in FIG. 61(s), the performance symbol 70a and the first special symbol TZ1 stop and display a losing result ("514"), and the icon TI is erased.

The first reserved icon display area 70B and the icon display area 70C may be redisplayed at a timing before the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol starts (for example, at the start of the stop time of the second special symbol, during the stop time of the second special symbol, or after the stop time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the start of the waiting state for customers, etc.), and a home mode entry effect (transition effect) suggesting a transition to the home mode (fourth time-shortened game state) may be executed. In this case, the remaining number of time-shortened times ZK "50 times remaining" may be displayed at the start of the home mode entry effect (transition effect), and the remaining number of time-shortened times ZK may be updated to "49 times" when the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol starts.

In addition, when transitioning from the normal game state to the second time-saving game state, the home mode is set and the home mode entry effect (transition effect) is executed, but in this case, since the jackpot game is not played via the way, the number of balls acquired KT and the number of jackpots AK are not displayed, and an image saying "Help time in progress" is displayed to indicate that the game is in the second time-saving game state.

In addition, while star marks are used in the panel icons to indicate the degree of expectation of a favorable result for the player, the degree of expectation may also be indicated by the color of the panel icon (for example, the order of expectation is blue < green < red < rainbow), or the degree of expectation may be indicated by both the star mark and the color (blue panel has one star mark, green panel has two star marks, red panel has three star marks, rainbow panel has four star marks, etc.).

In this way, the same right-hit notification can be executed in the challenge mode (special 2-time reduction) and the home mode (special 1-time reduction) that is controlled after the challenge mode ends; specifically, the right-hit small image MG1 can be continuously displayed. Therefore, even if the presentation mode (game state) is switched, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the right-hit notification, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the challenge mode (special 2-time shortening) and the home mode (special 1-time shortening) that is controlled after the challenge mode ends, the number of balls KT acquired during the consecutive advantageous periods is continuously displayed. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the advantageous gaming state continues even if the presentation mode (game state) is switched, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the challenge mode (special 2-time shortening) and the home mode (special 1-time shortening) that is controlled after the challenge mode ends, the number of jackpots AK during the consecutive advantageous periods is continuously displayed. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the advantageous gaming state continues even if the presentation mode (game state) is switched, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

When the second special symbol is a special miss special symbol (stop special symbol data "31"), the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed as a special miss number (a number that includes a "0", such as "505" or "606"), but the performance symbol 70a may be displayed as a special miss number (a number that includes a "0", such as "505" or "606" in the middle symbol) that is the same as the second special symbol TZ2, or, even when the second special symbol is a special miss special symbol (stop special symbol data "31"), the second special symbol TZ may be displayed as a normal miss number (a number that does not include a "0" in the middle symbol) that is the same as the performance symbol 70a.

(Example of a presentation when a jackpot game that transitions to Legend Mode A is executed)
Using Figure 62, an example of the presentation when a jackpot game that transitions to Legend Mode A (first time-saving game state) is executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 62(a), during a challenge performance in challenge mode, when a performance corresponding to the fourth (last) second special symbol change display of the remaining reserved number of second special symbols starts, a performance pattern 70a forming a reach state with "7" is displayed, a sudden "7" reach performance starts, and the fourth panel icon IC4 changes to an operation prompt image SG and a star mark is displayed next to it.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, the first movable member 73a moves, as shown in FIG. 62(b), and a success effect image SED is displayed around the first movable member 73a, and a "queen queen" sound effect is output, resulting in a success effect (decisive success effect).

After that, when the successful performance ends, as shown in FIG. 62(c), the performance pattern 70a of "777" temporarily stops, and an image of the text "GET LEGEND MODE!" is displayed, indicating that the conditions for transitioning to LEGEND MODE have been met.

Furthermore, after the variation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the performance pattern 70a and the second special pattern TZ2 stop at "777", and the text image "LEGEND MODE GET!" is displayed, while the text image "V Stock x 2" is displayed, indicating that the player has acquired two rights to a favorable result (a big win or a small win) (there is a high possibility of obtaining a favorable result for the player in the remaining two wins).

Then, when the pause time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 62(e), the opening performance of the fourth jackpot game starts and the right-hitting image MG3 is additionally displayed. Specifically, the text image "Legendary Bonus" is displayed, and a V stock display VST (here, an active display in which two "V" characters are displayed in yellow) is displayed, indicating the number of times that the player has been substantially guaranteed (confirmed) to have a favorable result (jackpot or small win). In addition, the round display RU for notifying the progress of the round game of the jackpot game is displayed inactive (10 circle marks corresponding to 10 round games are displayed in white), and the count display CU for notifying the winning status of the big prize winning slot in one round game is displayed inactive (10 circle marks corresponding to the maximum number of winnings in the big prize winning slot in one round are displayed in white).

After that, when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44, the execution conditions for executing multiple rounds of play in the jackpot game are met, and when the first round of play begins, the round performance begins as shown in FIG. 62(f), and the first (leftmost) circle mark on the round display RU switches from inactive (non-alert mode) to a red active display (alert mode). Also, when one game ball enters the jackpot hole, the first (leftmost) circle mark on the count display CU switches from white inactive to red active display as shown in FIG. 62(g).

When ten game balls enter the big prize opening during the first round of play, the ten circle marks on the count display CU switch from white inactive (non-alert mode) to red active display (alert mode) in order from the left, as shown in FIG. 62(h), and an interval performance begins. At this time, when an eleventh game ball, exceeding the ten big prizes, enters the big prize opening (an over-winning occurs), as shown in FIG. 62(i), the count display CU maintains the ten circle marks in an active display state (no additional circle marks are displayed after the eleventh), and an over-winning sound is output. Note that the over-winning sound is output up to the second over-winning, but is not output from the third over-winning onwards.

After that, when the second round of play begins, as shown in Figure 62 (j), the round presentation starts, the second circle mark (second from the left) of the round display RU switches from a white inactive (non-alert mode) to a red active display (alert mode), and all circle marks of the count display CU switch from an active display (non-alert mode) to an inactive display (alert mode). Then, after that, each time a game ball enters the big prize opening, the circle marks of the count display CU switch to an active display in order, and the presentation progresses in the same way as Figures 62 (f) to 62 (j) as the round of play progresses.

Note that while the inactive display of the round display RU and count display CU, which are displayed in common regardless of the type of jackpot game, is white, they may be displayed in gray or with just an outline, and while the active display of the round display RU and count display CU is red, they may be displayed in yellow or pink.

In addition, the active display of the V letter on the V stock display VST is yellow, but it could also be gold or red, and the inactive display of the V stock display VST is gray, but it could also be white or just an outline.

In addition, when a big win game is executed without going through a small win game, the round display RU and count display CU may be displayed inactively from the start of the opening, or the round display RU may be displayed actively from the start of the opening.

In this way, it has a first specific display area (a round display RU circle mark) that displays the first specific information (round display RU) in response to the execution of a jackpot game, and the first specific display area can be switched from an inactive display (white: non-notification mode) to an active display (red: notification mode) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (start of a round game). This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the player in the jackpot game and increase the enjoyment of the game.

It also has a second specific display area (a circle mark for the count display CU) that displays second specific information (count display CU) in response to the execution of a jackpot game, and the second specific display area can be switched from an inactive display (white) to an active display (red) when a predetermined condition is met (a win at the jackpot slot). This makes it easier for players to play the jackpot game, and makes it more fun to play.

The second specific display area (circle mark for count display CU) is changed to an inactive display (white) when the next round of play is executed, and when the specified condition is met again (a win in the big prize slot), the display is switched from the inactive display (white) to an active display. This makes it easier for players to play big prize games, and makes the game more enjoyable.

In addition, even if an over win occurs during a round of play, the over win sound is output without increasing the number of second specific display areas (circle marks). Therefore, the player can be made aware of the occurrence of an over win without being given the impression that the maximum number of wins in a round of play has increased (changed), making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when a specific special winning symbol (stop special symbol data "11", "13") among multiple winning symbols stops and the "7" effect symbol 70a is aligned, transitioning to legend mode, a V stock display is executed, which indicates the number of times that the variable effect has essentially guaranteed (confirmed) a favorable result for the player (a big win or a small win). This effectively stirs up the player's joy, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The V stock display also displays the number of times (two Vs) that the variable presentation is essentially guaranteed (confirmed) to result in a favorable outcome for the player (a big win or a small win). This makes it easier for the player to grasp the number of times that will result in a favorable outcome for the player, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

(Example of a presentation when a small win game is executed in Legend Mode A)
Using Figures 63 and 64, we will explain an example of the presentation when a small win game is executed in legend mode A (first time-saving game state).

As shown in FIG. 63(a), when the ending of the fourth jackpot game starts, the right-hit small image MG1 displayed during the round game, the V stock display VST (here, an active display in which two "V" letters are displayed in yellow), and the number of balls acquired during the series of advantageous periods KT and the number of jackpots AK described above are still displayed, and a Legend Mode A entry effect (transition effect) is performed, indicating that the game will enter Legend Mode A (first time-saving game state), and a warning notification is executed to draw the player's attention. Specifically, a text image saying "Entering Legend Mode A" is displayed, and the above-mentioned forget-to-play warning image TG is displayed.

After that, when the display period of the forgetting to pick up warning image TG has elapsed, the above-mentioned falling-in warning image NG is displayed and the V stock display VST continues, as shown in FIG. 63(b).

Then, when the ending period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 63(c), the Legend Mode A entry effect ends and the remaining number of time-saving times ZK corresponding to the number of times of special 2 time-saving times (J2) is displayed as "100 times remaining." Also, the display of the first special symbol begins to change, but the display pattern 70a does not change, and a change display begins in which the first special symbol TZ1 changes. Then, when the change time has elapsed after three game balls have entered the second starting hole 47, as shown in FIG. 63(d), the first special symbol TZ1 stops and displays a losing number ("438").

In addition, when the stop time has elapsed and the special miss variable display of the second special pattern has begun, as shown in FIG. 63(e), a variable display begins in which the display pattern 70a and the second special pattern TZ2 are displayed in a variable manner, and each icon displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D shifts and one of them is displayed as the icon TI.

Then, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 63(f), the performance symbol 70a stops at a losing number ("619"), and the second special symbol TZ2 stops at a special losing number ("609" with a "0" in the middle symbol), the icon TI is erased, and the remaining number of time-saving reels ZK is updated from "100 reels remaining" to "99 reels remaining."

After that, when the stop time has elapsed and the small win variable display of the second special pattern begins, as shown in FIG. 63(g), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the second special pattern TZ2 begins, and the icons displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D shift and one of them is displayed as the relevant icon TI.

Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, a countdown display (a timer effect different from the look-ahead countdown effect) is executed with the starting value being "3," as shown in Figures 63(h) to 63(j).

Furthermore, when the countdown display reaches "0", a preparation confirmation display (character image + text image "Are you ready?") is displayed as shown in FIG. 64(k), and the first V stock consumption performance is executed as shown in FIG. 64(l). Specifically, the active display "V" letter located at the top of the V stock display VST moves to the center of the screen and changes to an operation prompt image (performance button image + remaining effective time image), and the "V" letter located at the top of the V stock display VST becomes gray and inactive.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, the first movable member 73a moves, as shown in FIG. 64(m), and a success effect image SED is displayed around the first movable member 73a, and a "queen queen" sound effect is output, resulting in a success effect (decisive success effect).

After that, when the successful performance ends, the performance pattern 70a of "555", which is the winning number, temporarily stops, and when the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 64(n), the performance pattern 70a of "555", which is the winning number, stops, and the second special pattern TZ2 stops at the small winning number ("5V5" with a "V" in the middle pattern), and the icon TI is erased. In addition, a text image of "Legend mode continues!" is displayed, suggesting that Legend mode will continue.

When the pause time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 64(o), the opening performance of the small win game starts and the right-hitting image MG3 is additionally displayed. Specifically, the text image "CONTINUED BONUS" is displayed, indicating that the legend mode will continue, but since it is not yet determined at this point that the big win game will be executed, the round display RU and count display CU are not displayed.

After that, when the opening and closing game in the small win game starts, as shown in FIG. 64 (p), the indication image SZ is displayed inactively (displayed in a non-informing mode) to notify that a V big win game (a second round of play) will start when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44.

After that, when the opening and closing game of the small win game ends after the game ball that entered the first large winning opening 50 passes through the specific area 53, as shown in FIG. 64(q), the instruction image SZ is actively displayed (displayed in an informing manner) to notify that the V jackpot game (second round game) will start when the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44. Then, when the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44, as shown in FIG. 64(q), the instruction image SZ switches to display "It has started", the first round game and round performance start, and the round display RU and count display CU are displayed. At this time, the two circle marks from the left end of the round display RU are actively displayed, and the other circle marks are inactively displayed.

On the other hand, if the opening and closing game ends without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first large winning opening 50 during the small win game (small win break), the ending performance of the small win game is executed as shown in FIG. 64 (s). Specifically, the text image "End..." is displayed, and "NEXT Legend Mode B" is displayed to notify the transition to Legend Mode B.

Then, when the ending time of the small win game has elapsed and the variable display of the second special symbol has begun, as shown in FIG. 64(t), the first time-saving game state continues and transitions to Legend Mode B, and the remaining number of time-saving times ZK corresponding to the number of time-saving times for special 2 (J2) in the first time-saving game state is redisplayed as "98 times remaining." In addition, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the second special symbol TZ2 begins, and each reserved icon HI is shifted and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the Legend Mode B entry performance, which suggests that the mode will become Legend Mode B, is not executed.

In addition, if the opening and closing game ends without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first large winning port 50 during a small win game (small win blowout), the V stock display may be erased, or rush mode may be set instead of being set to legend mode B. Also, the remaining number of time-saving times ZK corresponding to the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) in the first time-saving game state may be erased, or the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) may be displayed in an unknown manner, such as "?? times."

Here, we have explained the case where a small win game is played in Legend Mode A after the "7" performance pattern 70a is lined up and a big win game is played, but if a small win game is played and then a big win game is played during the time-saving game state, the flow of the performance (display of the instruction image SZ, round display RU, count display CU, etc.) is basically the same, except that the V stock display VST is not displayed.

In this way, when the "7" effect pattern 70a is lined up with the stopping of a specific special winning pattern (special winning pattern data "11", "13") among multiple special winning patterns, it is possible to execute a V stock display (display specific information) that indicates the number of times that the variable effect has been substantially guaranteed (confirmed) to result in a favorable result (jackpot or small win) for the player, and when a variable effect that allows a jackpot game to be played in a time-saving game state in which the V stock display is being executed is executed, it is possible to execute a V stock consumption effect that suggests that the result will be favorable to the player (a jackpot game can be played) using the V stock display (specific information). Therefore, the subsequent effect of the effect can be improved due to the specific effect pattern being lined up, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, each time a variation effect (jackpot variation effect, small jackpot variation effect) that results in an advantageous result for the player is executed, a V stock consumption effect is executed using one V display (one of multiple pieces of specific information) from the V stock displays (displays of specific information). This makes it easier for the player to grasp the number of times that an advantageous result (jackpot or small jackpot) for the player is essentially guaranteed (confirmed), making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, among the V stock displays (displays of specific information), the V displays (specific information) on which the V stock consumption effect has been executed are switched from active display to inactive display. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the number of times that a result (a big win or a small win) advantageous to the player is essentially guaranteed (confirmed), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, it is possible to display a countdown before the V stock consumption effect is executed, suggesting that the V stock consumption effect will be executed. This enhances the effect of the V stock consumption effect and effectively heightens the player's sense of anticipation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

It also has a third specific display area (display area of the instruction image SZ) that displays third specific information (display of the instruction image SZ) in response to the execution of a jackpot game, and the third specific display area can be switched from an inactive display (non-alert mode) to an active display (alert mode) when a predetermined condition is met (a transition to a state in which a round game begins when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44). This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the player in the jackpot game and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of a small win game being executed in Legend Mode B but crashing)
Using Figures 65 and 66, we will explain an example of the presentation when a small win game is executed in legend mode B but it fails (the game ball does not pass through the specific area 53 and a big win game is not executed).

First, when the ending of various V jackpot games starts, the right-hit small image MG1 displayed during the round game, the V stock display VST (here, two "V" letters displayed in yellow for active display and in grey for inactive display), and the number of balls acquired during the series of advantageous periods KT and the number of jackpots AK described above are displayed, and a Legend Mode A entry effect (transition effect) is performed, indicating that the game will enter Legend Mode B (first time-saving game state), and a warning notification is executed to draw the player's attention. Specifically, a text image saying "Entering Legend Mode B" is displayed, and the above-mentioned forget-to-play warning image TG is displayed.

After that, when the display period of the forget-to-pick-up warning image TG has elapsed, the above-mentioned slip-in warning image NG is displayed and the V stock display continues, as shown in FIG. 65(a).

When the ending period has elapsed, the Legend Mode B entry effect ends and the remaining number of time-saving times ZK corresponding to the number of times of special 2 time-saving times (J2) is displayed as "100 times remaining." Also, when the variable display of the second special pattern begins, as shown in FIG. 65(b), a variable display begins in which the display pattern 70a and the second special pattern TZ2 are displayed in a variable manner, and each icon displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shifts and one is displayed as the icon TI.

After that, when the first special miss variation display of the second special symbol in Legend Mode B ends and the second small win variation display of the second special symbol begins, a countdown display with a starting value of "3" is executed after a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) has elapsed, and when the countdown display reaches "0", the above-mentioned preparation confirmation display is performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65(c), the second V stock consumption effect is executed. Specifically, the active "V" character located at the bottom of the V stock display VST moves to the center of the screen and changes to an operation prompting image (effect button image + remaining effective time image), and the "V" character located at the bottom of the V stock display VST becomes gray and inactive.

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, the first movable member 73a moves, as shown in FIG. 65(d), and a success effect image SED is displayed around the first movable member 73a, and a "queen queen" sound effect is output, resulting in a success effect (decisive success effect).

After that, when the successful effect ends, the effect pattern 70a of "555", which is the winning number, temporarily stops, and after the variation time has elapsed, the game transitions to the normal game state, and as shown in FIG. 65(e), the effect pattern 70a of "555", which is the winning number, stops, and the second special pattern TZ2 stops as a small winning number ("5V5" with a "V" in the middle pattern), and the icon TI is erased. Also, a text image of "Legend mode ended!" is displayed, indicating that legend mode is ending.

When the pause time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 65(f), the opening performance of the small win game starts and the right-hitting image MG3 is additionally displayed. Specifically, a text image of "RUSH BONUS" is displayed, indicating a transition to rush mode, but because it is not yet confirmed at this point that a big win game will be played, the round display RU and count display CU are not displayed.

In addition, if the opening and closing game ends without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first large winning opening 50 during the small win game (small win break), the ending performance of the small win game will be executed as shown in FIG. 65 (g). Specifically, the text image "End..." is displayed, and "NEXT Home Mode" is displayed to notify the transition to Home Mode (fourth time-saving game state) depending on the remaining second reserved number (U2).

Then, when the ending time of the small win game has elapsed and the variable display of the second special symbol has begun, as shown in FIG. 65(h), the special miss variable display of the second special symbol will begin while the ending performance and the right-hit small image MG1 continue to be displayed, and a variable display will begin in which only the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 65(i), the second special symbol TZ2 stops and displays a special miss result ("505" including a "0" in the middle symbol), and when the stopped time has elapsed, the game moves to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving), but as shown in FIG. 66(j), the special miss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts while the ending effect continues, and a fluctuation effect starts in which only the second special symbol TZ2 is displayed.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(k), the second special symbol TZ2 stops and displays a special miss result ("505" including a "0" in the middle symbol), and the game temporarily transitions to normal play. After the stop time has elapsed, the game transitions to the fourth time-saving play state (special 1 time-saving), but as shown in FIG. 66(l), the special miss change display of the second special symbol begins while the ending effect and the right-hit small image MG1 continue to be displayed, and a change effect in which only the second special symbol TZ2 changes and displays begins.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 66(m), the second special symbol TZ2 stops and displays a special losing number ("606" including a "0" in the middle symbol), and the game temporarily transitions to the normal game state. After the pause time has elapsed, the game transitions to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving), and since the second reserved number (U2) has become "0" at this point, a home mode entry effect (transition effect) is executed, suggesting that the game will enter the home mode (fourth time-saving game state). Specifically, a text image saying "Enter home mode" is displayed. In addition, the remaining time-saving number ZK corresponding to the special 1 time-saving number (J1) is displayed as "50 times remaining," and since the series of advantageous periods favorable to the player continues, the number of balls acquired KT and the number of jackpots AK remain displayed.

If the second reserved number (U2) is 0 when the opening and closing game ends without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first large winning opening 50 during a small win game (small win break) and the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) ends, the game basically does not transition to the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving), so the home mode entry effect (transition effect) is not executed. If the second reserved number (U2) is "1" or "2" when the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) ends, the home mode entry effect (transition effect) is executed when the special miss variable display of the second special pattern executed when the second reserved number (U2) became "0" stops.

On the other hand, if the game ball that entered the first large prize opening 50 during the small prize game in FIG. 65(f) passes through the specific area 53 and the opening and closing game of the small prize game ends, the presentation shown in FIG. 64(p) is executed and the game transitions to the presentation shown in FIG. 64(q).

In addition, if the second reserved number (U2) does not exist when the opening and closing game ends (small win burst) without passing through the specific area 53 inside the first large winning opening 50 during small win game, the ending performance of the small win game is executed without displaying "NEXT HOME MODE" which indicates a transition to HOME MODE (fourth time-shortened game state), and after the ending time has elapsed, the mode transition performance is not executed and the game transitions to normal presentation mode A.

Here, an example is shown in which the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) ends due to a small winning puncture, and then the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) is entered. However, even if the number of special 1 time-saving times (J1) or the number of special 2 time-saving times (J2) becomes "0" and the first time-saving game state (special 2 time-saving) ends, the home mode entry effect (transition effect) is basically executed when the special miss variable display of the second special pattern executed when the second reserved number (U2) becomes "0" stops.

In addition, the home mode entry effect (transition effect) was set to be executed when the second special pattern TZ2 stopped and displayed with a special missing number ("606" including a "0" in the middle pattern), but the home mode entry effect (transition effect) may be executed when the next variable effect (variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern) starts, or the home mode entry effect (transition effect) may be executed when the game is controlled to the fourth time-saving game state for the first time after the first time-saving game state ends.

In this way, if the jackpot game or the variable display of the special symbol is not executed after the end of the first time-saving game state and the game is controlled to the fourth time-saving game state, the execution of the home mode entry effect (transition effect) that suggests the game will enter the home mode (fourth time-saving game state) is restricted (it is executed when the second reserved number U2 is "0" and the game will not be controlled to the fourth time-saving game state again, but it is not executed when the second reserved number U2 is "1" or more and there is a possibility that the game will be controlled to the fourth time-saving game state again). This makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand the game progress, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the fourth time-saving game state ends without a jackpot game or a special symbol change display, and the game is controlled to the fourth time-saving game state, a home mode entry effect (transition effect) is executed only once, indicating that the game will enter the home mode (fourth time-saving game state). This makes it difficult for the player to misunderstand the game progress, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, if the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) is resumed after the end of the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) without a jackpot game or a special symbol change display being executed, the same right-hit notification (display of the right-hit small image MG1) can be continuously executed in the previous fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) and in the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) controlled after the previous fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving). Therefore, even if the game state is switched, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the right-hit notification, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the same right-hit notification (display of the right-hit small image MG1) can be continuously executed in the previous fourth time-shortened game state (special 1 time-shortened) and in the fourth time-shortened game state (special 1 time-shortened) that is controlled after the previous fourth time-shortened game state (special 1 time-shortened). Therefore, even if the presentation mode (game state) is switched, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the right-hit notification, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of balls acquired KT during the series of advantageous periods is continuously displayed in the previous fourth time-shortened game state (special 1 time-shortened) and in the fourth time-shortened game state (special 1 time-shortened) that is controlled after the previous fourth time-shortened game state (special 1 time-shortened). Therefore, even if the presentation mode (game state) is switched, it is easy for the player to recognize that the advantageous game state continues, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of jackpots AK during a series of advantageous periods is continuously displayed in the previous fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) and in the fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving) that is controlled after the previous fourth time-saving game state (special 1 time-saving). Therefore, even if the presentation mode (game state) is switched, it is easy for the player to recognize that the advantageous game state continues, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Content 1 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Here, in conventional gaming machines, it is common for the gaming machine to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player. Among such gaming machines, there are some that determine whether or not to execute a special game based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and execute a performance according to the determination result (for example, see JP 2018-118109 A). However, such gaming machines have a problem in that the interest of the game is low.

The first configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole); a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information; a game state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state; and a control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, based on the result of the judgment. The game includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling the presentation, the special games include a first special game and a second special game different from the first special game, the specific game states include a first specific game state (special 1 time reduction) in which the first acquisition condition is more likely to be established than the second acquisition condition, and a second specific game state (special 2 time reduction) in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be established than the first acquisition condition, and the game state control means is capable of controlling the game to the first specific game state after the first special game ends, and is capable of controlling the game to the second specific game state after the second special game ends. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole); judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information; and game state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game to a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game system includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations according to the results of the judgment, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (special 1 time reduction) in which the first acquisition condition is more likely to be met than the second acquisition condition, and a second specific game state (special 2 time reduction) in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be met than the first acquisition condition, and the game state control means is capable of controlling the game to the second specific game state for a predetermined period of time after the special game ends, and is capable of controlling the game to the first specific game state without going through the special game after the second specific game state ends. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a game state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state. The game system includes a state control means (main control board 110) and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling the presentation according to the result of the judgment, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (special 1 time reduction) in which the first acquisition condition is more likely to be met than the second acquisition condition, and a second specific game state (special 2 time reduction) in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be met than the first acquisition condition, and the game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to the first specific game state when the number of times it is judged that the special game will not be executed reaches a predetermined number. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing one of a plurality of special games (jackpot games) advantageous to a player, there is provided a winning device (large winning port) having a specific area provided therein, an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information acquired by the acquisition means, a specific game execution means (main control board 110) capable of executing a specific game (small jackpot game) that converts the winning device from a closed state to an open state based on the result of the judgment, a special game execution means (main control board 110) capable of executing the special game based on the winning of a gaming medium into the specific area during the specific game, a game state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 110) capable of controlling a variable presentation that changes and displays a plurality of presentation symbols based on the result of the judgment. 130), the end conditions of the specific game state include a first end condition that is established by a first number of times of a predetermined game, a second end condition that is established by a second number of times of the predetermined game that is greater than the first number of times, a third end condition that is established by a third number of times of the specific game, and a fourth end condition that is established by a fourth number of times of the specific game that is greater than the third number of times, and the game state control means controls the specific game state to end when either the first end condition or the third end condition is established after the special game ends if the game medium enters the specific area during the specific game executed after a specific performance pattern is stopped and displayed, and controls the specific game state to end when either the second end condition or the fourth end condition is established after the special game ends if the game medium enters the specific area during the specific game executed after a specific performance pattern is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: a winning device (big winning port) with a specific area provided therein; an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting port); a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information acquired by the acquisition means; a variable display execution means (main control board 110) capable of executing a variable display of a pattern based on the result of the judgment; a specific game execution means (main control board 110) capable of executing a specific game (small winning game) that converts the winning device from a closed state to an open state based on a specific pattern being displayed as a stopped pattern in the variable display; and a special game execution means (main control board 110) capable of executing the special game based on the winning of a gaming medium in the specific area during the specific game. The game state control means (main control board 110) is capable of controlling the game state to a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) is capable of controlling the presentation according to the result of the judgment. The end conditions of the specific game state include a first end condition that is established when a predetermined game is played a first number of times (e.g., once), and a second end condition that is established when the predetermined game is played a second number of times (e.g., 100 times) that is greater than the first number of times. The game state control means controls the game state to end when the first end condition is established if the game medium enters the specific area during the specific game when the normal game state is present, and controls the game state to end when the second end condition is established if the game medium enters the specific area during the specific game. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing one of a plurality of special games (jackpot games) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a gaming state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of executing a variable presentation which variably displays a plurality of presentation patterns based on the result of the judgment, the specific gaming state including a first specific gaming state (other than the legend mode) and a second specific gaming state (legend mode), and the gaming state control means is provided with a control means for controlling the specific gaming state to a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a control means for controlling the specific gaming state to a specific gaming state (other than the legend mode), and a control means for controlling the specific gaming state to a specific gaming state. When the specific special game (the fourth big win game, the first V big win game via the first small win game) is played, the second specific game state (legend mode) can be controlled after the special game ends, and when the variable performance in which the specific special game is played is played, the performance control means can display a stop result ("777") with a specific performance pattern in the variable performance, and when the variable performance in which the specific special game is played is played in the first specific game state (other than the legend mode), the rate at which the stop result ("777") with the specific performance pattern is displayed (15%) is different from the rate at which the variable performance in which the specific special game is played is played in the second specific game state (legend mode) (2%). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a reservation memory means (main control board 110) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reservation memory, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment means, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern based on the result of the judgment, and a display control means (main control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance during the variable performance. The effects to be performed include a first specific effect (N reach) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game, and a second specific effect (SP reach) that creates anticipation of the execution of the special game more than the first specific effect, and the effect control means is capable of executing the second specific effect (SP reach) after executing the first specific effect (N reach) in one of the variable effects based on the result of the judgment, and when it is pre-determined that the second specific effect will be executed while the reserved memory exists, it is capable of executing the first specific effect (N reach) in the variable effect one before the execution of the second specific effect, and executing the second specific effect (SP reach) in the next variable effect without executing the first specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole); a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information; a reserve memory means (main control board 110) for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserve memory; a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment means; and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance by a performance pattern based on the result of the judgment, and the performances executed during the variable performance include a first specific performance (N reach) that gives an expectation of the execution of the special game, and a second specific performance (SP reach) that gives an expectation of the execution of the special game more than the first specific performance. The second specific performance includes a first period performance (SP reach first half performance) and a second period performance (SP reach second half performance) executed after the first period performance, and the performance control means is capable of executing the first period performance of the second specific performance after executing the first specific performance in one of the variable performances based on the result of the judgment, and executing the second period performance of the second specific performance after that, and when it is pre-determined that the second specific performance is executed while the reserved memory is present, executing the first period performance (SP reach first half performance) of the second specific performance in the variable performance one before the execution of the second specific performance, and executing the second period performance (SP reach second half performance) of the second specific performance in the next variable performance without executing the first specific performance and the first period performance (SP reach first half performance) of the second specific performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the entry of a gaming medium (gaming ball) launched into the gaming area into a first start area (first start port) or a second start area (second start port), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a gaming state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state to a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation according to the result of the judgment, and the specific gaming state includes a ball that is more advantageous to the player than the second start area. The game state includes a first specific game state (special 1 time reduction) in which the game medium is more likely to enter the first starting area, and a second specific game state (special 2 time reduction) in which the game medium is more likely to enter the second starting area than the first starting area, and the game state control means can control the game state to the second specific game state for a predetermined period after the special game ends, and can control the game state to the first specific game state after the second specific game state ends without going through the special game, and the presentation control means can execute a launch suggestion notification (right hit notification) that suggests the launch mode of the game medium during the specific game state, and can execute the launch suggestion notification of the same mode (right hit small image) in the second specific game state and the first specific game state controlled after the second specific game state ends. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, comprising: an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the entry of a gaming medium (game ball) launched into the game area into a first starting area (first starting hole) or a second starting area (second starting hole); a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information; a gaming state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game to a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling the presentation according to the result of the judgment. The specific game state includes a first specific game state (special 1 time reduction) in which the game medium is more likely to enter the first starting area than the second starting area, the game state control means can control the game state to the first specific game state for a predetermined period of time, and can control the game state to the first specific game state again after the end of the first specific game state without going through the special game, the presentation control means can execute a launch suggestion notification (right hit notification) that suggests the launch mode of the game medium during the specific game state, and can continuously execute the suggestion notification of the same mode (right hit small image) in the first specific game state and the first specific game state that is controlled again after the end of the first specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a game state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 110) capable of controlling the presentation according to the result of the judgment. The specific game state includes a first specific game state (special 1 time reduction) in which the first acquisition condition is more likely to be satisfied than the second acquisition condition, the game state control means is capable of controlling the game to the first specific game state for a predetermined period of time, and is capable of controlling the game to the first specific game state again after the end of the first specific game state without going through the special game, the presentation control means is capable of executing a transition presentation (entry presentation) indicating that the game is being controlled to the first specific game state, and executes the transition presentation only once when the game is controlled to the first specific game state again after the end of the first specific game state without going through the special game. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing one of a plurality of special games (jackpot games) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a game state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 110) capable of executing a variable presentation in which a plurality of presentation patterns are displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment. 130), the game state control means is capable of controlling to the specific game state (legend mode) after the special game ends, the presentation control means is capable of displaying a specific presentation symbol combination ("777") in the variable presentation when the specific special game is played, and is capable of displaying specific information (V stock display) after the specific presentation symbol combination ("777") is displayed, and is capable of playing a specific presentation (V stock consumption presentation) using the specific information when the variable presentation that allows the special game to be played is played in the specific game state in which the specific information is displayed. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing one of a plurality of special games (jackpot games) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first start hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second start hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a reservation memory means (main control board 110) for storing the judgment information acquired upon the establishment of the first acquisition condition and for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reservation memory (first reservation) and for storing the judgment information acquired upon the establishment of the second acquisition condition and for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reservation memory (second reservation), and a storage means (main control board 110) for storing the judgment information acquired upon the establishment of the second acquisition condition and for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reservation memory (second reservation) for a predetermined period after the end of the special game. The game state control means (main control board 110) can control the game state to a specific game state (time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the presentation control means (presentation control board 130) can execute a variable presentation that displays a variable presentation based on the result of the judgment. When a specific variable presentation in which a specified special game (fourth jackpot game) is executed is executed, the presentation control means can display a specific combination of presentation patterns ("777") in the variable presentation, and when the specific variable presentation executed based on the second reserved memory at the time when the specific game state ends satisfies a specified condition (the final reserved memory of the remaining reserved memory of the second special pattern), the display of the specific combination of presentation patterns ("777") in the specific variable presentation is restricted (not displayed). This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a 14th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of executing a variable performance that variably displays multiple performance patterns based on the result of the judgment, and the performance executed during the variable performance includes a first performance (first skill performance) associated with a first combination of the multiple performance patterns and a second performance (second skill performance) associated with a second combination of the multiple performance patterns, and the performance control means is capable of executing the first performance (first skill performance) when the performance pattern that is the first combination is displayed in the variable performance, and is capable of executing the second performance (second skill performance) when the performance pattern that is the second combination is displayed in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, which includes an acquisition means (main control board 110) capable of acquiring judgment information (special game judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to play the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance according to the result of the judgment, and the performance control means is capable of controlling a specific display area (count display area, round display area) for displaying information to the player during the special game, and switches the specific display area from a non-notification mode (inactive display: white) to a notification mode (active display, red) when a predetermined condition is established (transition to a state in which a round game starts when a game ball passes through the normal game gate 44, start of a round game, etc.). This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed simultaneously (in parallel), and the second special symbol is displayed preferentially. However, the gaming machine may be configured to display the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed in the order of winning balls in the various first start holes (first start hole A45, first start hole B46) and second start hole 47.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured not to generate a probability variable game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in the normal game state after the end of a jackpot game, but a probability variable game state may be generated depending on the type of special jackpot pattern. In this case, a process may be performed to generate a probability variable game state on the condition that the game ball passes through a specific area 53 provided inside the first large prize opening 50 in a specific round of play during a jackpot game (for example, the second round of play or the final round of play), or a process may be performed to determine the number of variable displays that will result in a probability variable game state based on the game state when the game ball passes through the specific area 53.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used in a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine) that can award a predetermined amount of prize medals (prize medal data) to a player when a winning symbol is displayed stopped on an active line by playing with medals (gaming media) (satisfying the awarding conditions). Furthermore, it can also be used in a Jankyu gaming machine or an Arrange Ball gaming machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 Normal map gate 45 First starting gate A
46 First starting hole B
47 Second start port 50 First big prize port 56 Second big prize port 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Performance control board 130a Sub-CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing any one of a plurality of special games advantageous to a player,
A prize-winning device having a specific area provided therein;
An acquisition means capable of acquiring judgment information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition;
A determination unit capable of determining the determination information acquired by the acquisition unit ;
a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game for changing the winning device from a closed state to an open state based on the result of the determination;
a special game execution means for executing the special game based on the winning of a game medium in the specific area during the specific game;
A game state control means capable of controlling a time-saving game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state;
A performance control means capable of executing a variable performance that displays a plurality of performance symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the judgment,
In the time- saving gaming state,
A first time- saving gaming state and a second time- saving gaming state are included,
The game state control means includes:
When a specific special game among the plurality of special games is executed based on the winning of a game medium in the specific area during the specific game , the game state can be controlled to the second time-saving game state after the special game ends;
The performance control means includes:
When the variation performance is executed to notify the player that the specific game, which is the trigger for the execution of the specific special game, is executed, the variation performance can display a stop result of a first specific performance pattern,
When the variable performance is executed to notify the player that a specific game that is a trigger for the execution of a special game different from the specific special game will be played, the variable performance can display a stop result with a second specific performance pattern different from the first specific performance pattern,
When the variable performance is executed to notify the player that the specific game, which is a trigger for the execution of the specific special game, is performed in the first time-saving game state, the percentage of the stop result of the first specific performance pattern is displayed;
When the variable performance is executed to notify the player that the specific game, which is the trigger for the execution of the specific special game, will be performed in the second time-saving game state, the rate at which the stop results of the first specific performance pattern are displayed is different from the rate at which the stop results of the first specific performance pattern are displayed,
The game state control means includes:
When the game medium enters the specific area during the execution of the specific game due to the display of the stop result of the first specific performance pattern in the variable performance executed during the first time-saving game state, the game medium is in the time-saving game state when the game medium enters the specific area, and the game medium is in the time-saving game state when the special game executed based on the winning is completed,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the gaming medium enters the specific area during the execution of the specific game due to the display of a stop result of the second specific performance pattern in the variable performance executed during the first time-shortened gaming state, the gaming machine can be controlled to the first time-shortened gaming state upon the end of the special game executed based on the winning, if the gaming medium enters the specific area during the normal gaming state .